summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/31317-8.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '31317-8.txt')
-rw-r--r--31317-8.txt7910
1 files changed, 7910 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/31317-8.txt b/31317-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca56cf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31317-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7910 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Campaign of the Jungle, by Edward
+Stratemeyer, Illustrated by A. B. Shute
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Campaign of the Jungle
+ or, Under Lawton through Luzon
+
+
+Author: Edward Stratemeyer
+
+
+
+Release Date: February 18, 2010 [eBook #31317]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Dan Horwood, and the Project
+Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+ file which includes the original illustrations.
+ See 31317-h.htm or 31317-h.zip:
+ (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/31317/31317-h/31317-h.htm)
+ or
+ (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/31317/31317-h.zip)
+
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+ Text in italics is enclosed by underscores (_italics_).
+
+ Text in bold face is enclosed by equal signs (=bold=).
+
+
+
+
+
+THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE
+
+by
+
+Edward Stratemeyer
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+EDWARD STRATEMEYER'S BOOKS
+
+Old Glory Series
+
+ _Cloth Illustrated Price per volume $1.25._
+
+ UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA Or the War Fortunes of a Castaway.
+ A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA Or Fighting for the Single Star.
+ FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS Or Under Schley on the Brooklyn.
+ UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES Or a Young Officer in the Tropics.
+ THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE Or Under Lawton through Luzon.
+
+
+The Bound to Succeed Series
+
+ _Three volumes Cloth Illustrated Price per volume $1.25._
+
+ RICHARD DARE'S VENTURE Or Striking Out for Himself.
+ OLIVER BRIGHT'S SEARCH Or The Mystery of a Mine.
+ TO ALASKA FOR GOLD Or The Fortune Hunters of the Yukon.
+
+
+The Ship and Shore Series
+
+ _Three volumes Cloth Illustrated Price per volume $1.25._
+
+ THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE Or Larry Foster's Strange Voyage.
+ REUBEN STONE'S DISCOVERY Or The Young Miller of Torrent Bend.
+ TRUE TO HIMSELF Or Roger Strong's Struggle for Place.
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "You are from the Olympia, I believe?"--_Page 23._]
+
+
+Old Glory Series
+
+THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE
+
+Or
+Under Lawton through Luzon
+
+by
+
+EDWARD STRATEMEYER
+
+Author of "Under Dewey at Manila," "A Young Volunteer
+in Cuba," "Fighting in Cuban Waters," "Under Otis
+in the Philippines," "To Alaska for Gold"
+"Richard Dare's Venture," "Oliver
+Bright's Search," Etc.
+
+Illustrated by A. B. Shute
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Boston
+Lee and Shepard Publishers
+1900
+
+Copyright, 1900, by Lee and Shepard.
+All Rights Reserved.
+
+The Campaign of the Jungle.
+
+Norwood Press
+J. S. Cushing & Co.--Berwick & Smith
+Norwood Mass. U.S.A.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+"The Campaign of the Jungle" is a complete story in itself, but forms
+the fifth volume of the "Old Glory Series," a line of tales depicting
+life and adventure in our army and navy of to-day.
+
+The heroes of these various stories are the three Russell brothers,
+Larry, Walter, and Ben. In the first volume we told of Larry's
+adventures while "Under Dewey at Manila," in the second and fourth we
+followed Ben as "A Young Volunteer in Cuba" and during the opening
+campaign "Under Otis in the Philippines," while in the third tale we
+saw what Walter could do "Fighting in Cuban Waters."
+
+In the present volume the reader is asked to follow the fortunes of
+both Larry and Ben in two important expeditions of that gallant
+soldier, General Henry W. Lawton, the first directed against Santa
+Cruz on the Laguna de Bay, where the insurgents were left badly
+scattered, and the second from Manila to San Isidro, a winding advance
+of about one hundred and fifty miles through the jungle, which took
+twenty days to complete, and during which time twenty-two battles were
+fought and twenty-eight towns were captured, along with large
+quantities of army stores and the like. This latter expedition was one
+of the most daring of its kind, and could not have been pushed to
+success had not the man at its head been what he was, a trained Indian
+fighter of our own West, and one whose nerve and courage were almost
+beyond comprehension. Small wonder it was that when, later on, General
+Lawton was killed on the firing line, General Otis cabled, "Great loss
+to us and to his country."
+
+As in the previous volumes of this series, the author has endeavored
+to be as accurate, historically, as possible, and for this reason has
+examined the reports of the officers high in command, as well as
+listened to many tales related by the returning soldiers themselves.
+It is therefore hoped that if any errors have crept in they may not be
+of sufficient magnitude to hurt the general usefulness of the work
+from an historical standpoint. As a story of adventure, the writer
+trusts it will find equal favor with those that have preceded it in
+the series.
+
+EDWARD STRATEMEYER.
+
+ Newark, N. J.,
+ March 1, 1900.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+ I. Dismaying News 1
+ II. Something about the Situation at Malolos 10
+ III. An Adventure on the Pasig River 20
+ IV. The Gap in the Firing Line 30
+ V. An Encounter at the River 41
+ VI. In which Luke Striker is Wounded 52
+ VII. The Retreat to the Rice-house 61
+ VIII. A Prisoner of the Filipinos 70
+ IX. The Advance into the Jungle 81
+ X. The Taking of Angat 91
+ XI. The Crossing of the Rio Grande River 101
+ XII. Something about a Poisoned Well 112
+ XIII. In which a Flag of Truce is fired Upon 122
+ XIV. Surrounded by the Enemy 132
+ XV. The Escape from the Burning House 141
+ XVI. News from Home 150
+ XVII. In and out of a Strange Pitfall 160
+ XVIII. The Adventure at the Mill-house 169
+ XIX. News of Larry 179
+ XX. The Advance upon Maasin 189
+ XXI. Camping Over a Powder Magazine 199
+ XXII. The Result of an Ambush 208
+ XXIII. The Tornado in the Cane-brake 218
+ XXIV. The Flight for Liberty 227
+ XXV. The Caves under the Mountain 235
+ XXVI. Boxer the Scout 244
+ XXVII. The Departure of the _Olympia_ 257
+ XXVIII. The Advance upon San Isidro 267
+ XXIX. Larry is sentenced to be Shot 280
+ XXX. A Rescue under Difficulties 292
+ XXXI. The Fall of San Isidro--conclusion 305
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+ "'You are from the _Olympia_, I believe?'" Frontispiece
+ PAGE
+ "'Alto!' came the sudden cry" 47
+ "'Hullo, sailor, where did you come from?'" 82
+ "'The well is poisoned! don't drink! it will kill
+ you!'" 115
+ "His sword kept the two Tagals back" 146
+ "'Can you hold on a few minutes longer?'" 173
+ "On they plodded, up an incline that seemed to have
+ no end" 236
+ "Down went the sapling over the edge of the cliff" 281
+
+
+
+
+THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+DISMAYING NEWS
+
+
+"How are you feeling to-day, Ben?"
+
+"Fairly good, Larry. If it wasn't for this awfully hot weather, the
+wound wouldn't bother me at all. The doctor says that if I continue to
+improve as I have, I can rejoin my company by the middle of next
+week."
+
+"You mustn't hurry matters. You did enough fighting at Caloocan,
+Malabon, Polo, and here, to last you for some time. Let the other
+fellows have a share of it." And Larry Russell smiled grimly as he
+bent over his elder brother and grasped the hand that was thrust
+forward.
+
+"I am willing the other fellows should have their share of the
+fighting, Larry. But you must remember that now Captain Larchmore is
+dead, and Lieutenant Ross is down with the fever, there is nobody to
+command our company but me--unless, of course, Sergeant Gilmore takes
+charge."
+
+"Then let Gilmore play captain for a while, while you take the rest
+you have so well earned. Why, you've been working like a steam-engine
+ever since you landed in Luzon. Gilbert Pennington says he never
+dreamed there was so much fight in you, and predicts that you'll come
+out a brigadier general by the time Aguinaldo and his army are
+defeated."
+
+"Well, I believe in pushing things," responded Ben Russell, smiling
+more broadly than ever, as his mind wandered back to that fierce
+attack on Malolos, where he had received the bullet wound in the side.
+"If we can only keep the insurgents on the run, we'll soon make them
+throw down their arms. But tell me about yourself, Larry. What have
+you been doing since you were up here last?"
+
+"Oh, I've been putting in most of my time on board the _Olympia_, as
+usual," replied the young tar. "About all we are doing is to nose
+around any strange vessels that come into the harbor. Since the
+outbreak in Manila last February, the navy has had next to nothing to
+do, and I'm thinking strongly of asking to be transferred to the
+marines at Cavite, or elsewhere."
+
+"I don't blame you." Ben Russell paused. "Have you heard anything more
+about Braxton Bogg and that hundred and forty thousand dollars he said
+he had left hidden in Benedicto Lupez's house in Manila?"
+
+A shade of anxiety crossed Larry Russell's face. "Yes, I've heard a
+good deal--more than I wanted to, Ben. But I wasn't going to speak of
+it, for fear of adding to your worry and making you feel worse."
+
+"Why, Larry, you don't mean-- Has Braxton Bogg escaped from jail and
+got hold of the money again?"
+
+"No, Braxton Bogg is still in prison at Manila, although the
+Buffalo bank officials are about to have him returned to the
+United States for trial. But the money has disappeared. The police
+authorities at Manila went to Benedicto Lupez's house, to find it
+locked up and deserted. They broke in and made a search, but they
+couldn't find a dollar, either in Spanish or American money, although
+they did find Braxton Bogg's valise and a dozen or more printed bands
+of the Hearthstone Saving Institution--the kind of bands they put
+around five-hundred-dollar and one-thousand-dollar packages of
+bills."
+
+"Then this Spaniard found where Bogg had hidden the money and made off
+with it?"
+
+"That is the supposition; and I reckon it's about right, too. Of
+course, it may be possible that Braxton Bogg never left the stolen
+money in Lupez's house, although he swears he did. He says Lupez was
+an old friend of his and was going to have the bills changed into
+Spanish money for him, so that Bogg could use the cash without being
+suspected of any wrong-doing."
+
+"It's too bad; and just as we thought our fifteen or sixteen thousand
+dollars of the amount was safe. I wonder what the bank people at home
+will say now."
+
+"Of course, they won't like it. They would rather have the money than
+their missing cashier; and I would rather have the money, too--not but
+that Braxton Bogg ought to be punished for his crimes."
+
+"Yes, Larry, Braxton Bogg deserves all the law can give him, for the
+depositors in the Hearthstone Saving Institution were mostly poor,
+hard-working persons, and the wrecking of the bank meant untold
+hardships for them." The wounded brother sighed deeply. "If that money
+isn't recovered, we'll be as badly off as we were when we first came
+to Manila," he concluded.
+
+Ben Russell was the eldest of three brothers, Walter coming next, and
+Larry being the youngest. They were orphans, and at the death of their
+widowed mother had been left in the care of their uncle, Job Dowling,
+a miserly man whose chief aim in life had been to hoard money, no
+matter at what cost, so long as his method was within the limit of the
+law.
+
+The boys were all sturdy and had been used to a good home, and Job
+Cowling's harsh and dictatorial manner cut them to the quick. A clash
+between guardian and wards had resulted in the running away of the
+three youths, and the guardian had tried in vain to bring them back.
+Larry had drifted to San Francisco and shipped on a merchantman bound
+for China. He had become a castaway and been picked up by the Asiatic
+Squadron of the United States Navy. This was just at the time of the
+outbreak of the war with Spain, and how gallantly the young tar served
+his country has already been told in detail in "Under Dewey at
+Manila."
+
+Ben had found his way to New York, and Walter had drifted to Boston.
+After several adventures, the war fever had caught both, and Ben had
+joined the army to become "A Young Volunteer in Cuba," as already
+related in the volume of that name, while Walter had joined the
+armored cruiser _Brooklyn_ and participated in the destruction of the
+Spanish fleet in Santiago Bay, as told in "Fighting in Cuban Waters."
+
+While the three boys were away from home, Job Dowling had overreached
+himself by trying to sell some of the Russell heirlooms which it had
+been willed the lads should keep. The heirlooms had been stolen by a
+sharper, and it had cost the old man a neat sum of money to get them
+back. The experience made him both a sadder and a wiser man, and from
+that time on his manner changed, and when the boys returned from the
+war they found that he had turned over a new leaf. In the future he
+was perfectly willing that they should "do fer themselves," as he
+expressed it.
+
+After a brief stay in Buffalo, Walter had left, to rejoin the
+_Brooklyn_, which was bound for a cruise to Jamaica and elsewhere.
+At this time trouble began to break out between the United States
+troops in the Philippines and the insurgents who had been fighting
+the now-conquered Spaniards, and it looked as if another fair-sized
+war was at hand. This being so, Ben lost no time in reënlisting in
+the army, while Larry hastened to join Admiral Dewey's flagship
+_Olympia_ once more. "If there's to be any more fighting, I want
+to be right in it," was what the young tar said, and Ben agreed with
+him. How they journeyed to Manila by way of the Mediterranean, the
+Suez Canal, and the Indian Ocean, has already been related in "Under
+Otis in the Philippines." Ben was at this time second lieutenant
+of Company D of his regiment. With the two boys went Gilbert
+Pennington, Ben's old friend of the Rough Riders, who was now first
+sergeant of Company B of the same regiment, and half a dozen others
+who had fought with the young volunteer in Cuba. On arriving at
+Manila Larry found matters, so far as it concerned his ship, very
+quiet, but Ben was at once sent to the front, and participated with
+much honor to himself in the campaign which led to the fall of
+Malolos, a city that was at that time the rebel capital. As Company D,
+with Ben at its head as acting captain, had rushed down the main
+street of the place, an insurgent sharpshooter had hit the young
+commander in the side, and he had fallen, to be picked up later and
+placed in the temporary hospital which was opened up in Malolos as
+soon as it was made certain that the rebels had been thoroughly
+cleaned out. Fortunately for the young volunteer the wound, though
+painful, was not serious.
+
+Of the fifteen thousand to twenty thousand dollars coming to the
+Russell brothers, more than three-quarters had been invested by Job
+Dowling in the Heathstone Saving Institution, a Buffalo bank that had
+promised the close-minded man a large rate of interest. The cashier of
+this bank, Braxton Bogg, had absconded, taking with him all the
+available cash which the institution possessed. Bogg had come to
+Manila, and there Ben had fallen in with him several times and finally
+accomplished his arrest. It was found that Braxton Bogg had very
+little money on his person, and the guilty cashier finally admitted
+that he had left his booty at the house of one Benedicto Lupez, a
+Spaniard with whom he had boarded. As all the Spaniards in Manila were
+being closely watched by the soldiers doing police duty in the
+disturbed city, both Ben and Larry had supposed that there would be
+no further trouble in getting possession of the missing money. But
+Benedicto Lupez had slipped away unperceived, taking the stolen money
+with him, and the Russell inheritance--or at least the larger portion
+of it--was as far out of the reach of the boys as ever.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+SOMETHING ABOUT THE SITUATION AT MALOLOS
+
+
+"Do you know if the Manila authorities have any idea where this
+Benedicto Lupez has gone to?" asked Ben, after partaking of some
+delicacies which Larry had managed to obtain for him.
+
+"They think he got on a small boat and went up the Pasig River. He is
+supposed to have a brother living in Santa Cruz on the Laguna de Bay.
+This brother is said to be in thorough sympathy with the insurgents."
+
+"In that case he is out of our reach for the present, as the rebels,
+so I understand, have a pretty good force in and around Santa Cruz.
+But if this Lupez has the money, I can't understand how he would join
+the rebels. They'll try to get the cash from him, if they need it."
+
+"Perhaps he is foolish enough to think that they will win out in this
+fight, Ben. You know how hot-headed some of these people are. They
+haven't any idea of the real power of Uncle Sam. I believe if they
+did know, they would submit without another encounter."
+
+"It would be best if they did, Larry, for now that we are in this
+fight we are bound to make them yield. Once they throw down their
+arms, I feel certain our country will do what is fair and honest by
+them."
+
+"It's the leaders who are urging the ignorant common people on--I've
+heard more than one of the officers say so. The leaders are well
+educated and crafty, and they can make the masses believe almost
+anything. Why, just before I came away from Manila I saw a dozen or
+more Igorottes brought in--tall, strapping fellows, but as ignorant as
+so many children. They seemed to be dazed when their wounds were cared
+for and they were offered food. The interpreter said they thought they
+would be massacred on the spot by the bloodthirsty _Americanos_, and
+they had a lurking suspicion that they were being cared for just so
+they could be sold into slavery."
+
+At this juncture a tall, thoroughly browned soldier came in, wearing
+the uniform of a first lieutenant.
+
+"Well, Ben, how is it to-day," he said cheerily, as he extended his
+hand. "And how are you, Larry?" And he likewise shook hands with the
+young tar.
+
+"I'm hoping to get out soon, Gilbert," answered Ben. "But what's
+this--a lieutenant's uniform?"
+
+"Yes, I've been promoted to first lieutenant of Company B," returned
+Gilbert Pennington. "I tell you, we are all climbing up the ladder,
+and Larry must look to his laurels. I understand you are to be made
+permanent captain of Company D."
+
+"But where is First Lieutenant Crunger of your company?"
+
+"Disappeared," and the young Southerner's face took on a sober look.
+"That's the only thing that mars my happiness over my promotion. After
+the taking of Malolos, Jack Crunger disappeared utterly, and we
+haven't been able to find hide nor hair of him, although half a dozen
+scouting parties have been sent out and the stream has been dragged in
+several places."
+
+"Perhaps he was taken prisoner," suggested Larry. "I heard some of the
+Kansas and Utah men were missing, too."
+
+"We are afraid he is a prisoner, and if that is so, Aguinaldo's men
+have probably taken him up to San Fernando, where the insurgents are
+setting up their new capital."
+
+"And what is going on at the firing line?" asked Ben, eagerly. "Are
+they following up the rebels' retreat?"
+
+"I'm sorry to say no. General MacArthur made a reconnaissance in the
+direction of Calumpit, but it amounted to little."
+
+"I understand that the _Charleston_ has sailed up the coast and is
+going to shell Dagupan," put in Larry. "Dagupan, you know, is the
+terminus of the railroad line."
+
+"That's good," came from the sick brother. "If we can get a footing in
+Dagupan, we can work the railroad territory from both ends." But this
+was not to be, as coming events speedily proved, for the shelling of
+the city by the warship amounted to but little.
+
+Gilbert Pennington knew all about the Braxton Bogg affair and listened
+with interest to what Larry had to relate.
+
+"It's too bad," he declared. "I'd like to give you some hope, boys,
+but I'm afraid you'll have to whistle for your fortune. That Spaniard
+will keep out of the reach of the Americans, and if the worst comes
+to the worst, he'll slip off to Spain or South America; you mark my
+words."
+
+Larry's leave of absence was for forty-eight hours only, and soon he
+was forced to bid his brother and his friend good-by. "Now take good
+care of yourself, Ben," he said, on parting. "And do stay here until
+you are stronger. Remember that a wounded man can't stand this
+broiling sun half as well as one who isn't wounded, and even the
+strongest of them are suffering awfully from the heat."
+
+"I'll make him stay," put in Gilbert, with mock severity. "Surgeon
+Fallox won't give him clearance papers until I tell him, for he's a
+great friend of mine."
+
+"I'm going to have a word with Stummer before I go," added Larry, and
+hurried to the ward in which the sturdy German volunteer had been
+placed. He found the member of Ben's company propped up on some grass
+pillows, smoking his favorite brier-root pipe.
+
+"Sure, an' I vos glad to see you, Larry," cried Carl, his round face
+broadening into a smile on beholding his visitor. "Yah, I vos doin'
+putty goot, und I peen out on der firin' line next veek maype. But
+say, I vos sorry I peen shot town pefore we got to Malolos. I vos dink
+sure I help clean dose repels out."
+
+"Never mind, you did your duty, Carl. I've heard they are going to
+make you a corporal for your bravery."
+
+"Sure, an' that's right," came in an Irish voice behind the pair, and
+Dan Casey, another volunteer of Ben's company, appeared. "It's mesilf
+as has the honor av saying it first, too, Carl. You are to be first
+corporal, Carl, wid meself doin' juty as second corporal."
+
+The German volunteer's face lit up for a second, then fell suspiciously.
+"Say, Dan, vos dis a choke maype?" he said slowly.
+
+"A joke, is it?" burst out Casey. "Sure, an' do ye think I'd be
+afther playin' a joke on a wounded man, Carl? No, it's no joke.
+We're raised to the dignity av officers be the forchunes av war an'
+the recommendations av our superior, Actin' Captain Russell, which
+same will soon be our captain be commission, Providence an' the
+President willin'."
+
+"Good for Ben!" exclaimed Larry. "You both deserve it." And after a
+few words more he hurried off, leaving the two old soldiers to
+congratulate themselves on their advancement and speculate upon how
+high they might rise in the service before the rebellion should close.
+Casey had his eye set on a captaincy, but Stummer said he would be
+quite content if any commissioned office came his way, even if it was
+but a second-lieutenancy.
+
+Malolos had been captured on Friday, March 31, 1899, at a little after
+ten o'clock in the morning, although the fighting kept up until nearly
+nightfall. As soon as the rebels were thoroughly cleaned out, many of
+the soldiers were called upon to do duty as firemen, for a large
+portion of the town was in flames. While the fire was being put out,
+other soldiers went about stopping the Chinese from looting the
+deserted mansions. The coolies were at first made prisoners and put
+under guard in the public park, but later on they were released and
+set to work to clean the streets.
+
+As Gilbert had said, the days immediately following the fall of
+Malolos were not of special activity. The hard, running fight along
+the railroad through Caloocan, Polo, and other places, had all but
+exhausted the army under General MacArthur, and when the insurgents'
+capital was taken, it was felt that the soldiers had earned a
+well-needed rest. Moreover, many had been wounded and many more were
+down, suffering from the heat and tropical fever, and these had to be
+cared for in the temporary hospitals established at various points in
+the neighborhood. In the meantime the railroad was repaired and
+Malolos was made a new base for supplies. There were several
+skirmishes in the neighborhood north and northeast of Malolos, and in
+these the rebels were compelled to fall back still further, yet the
+outbreaks amounted to but little.
+
+In the meantime, the Philippine Commission of the United States issued
+a proclamation, translated into the Spanish and Tagalog languages,
+calling upon the insurgents to throw down their arms and promising
+them good local government, the immediate opening of schools and
+courts of law, the building of railroads, and a civil service
+administration in which the native should participate. This
+proclamation was widely distributed, yet it did little good; for the
+common people of the islands were given to understand by their leaders
+that the Americans did not mean what they said, but had come to their
+country only to plunder them, and would in the end treat them even
+worse than had the Spaniards.
+
+It was no easy work to repair the railroad running from Manila to
+Malolos Station, which was some distance from the town proper. All
+tools and equipments had to be brought up from Manila and from Cavite,
+and soon the engineering corps found themselves harassed by some
+rebels in the vicinity of Marilao and Guiguinto. At once General
+MacArthur sent out a force to clear the ground, and several sharp
+attacks ensued, which resulted in the loss of twenty-three killed and
+wounded on the American side, and double that number to the enemy. In
+the end the rebels fled to the mountains to the eastward and to
+Calumpit on the north.
+
+"We are going out to-morrow," said Gilbert, as he came to see Ben on
+the day following the engagements just mentioned. "General Wheaton
+says he is going to drive the rebels straight into the mountains--and
+I reckon he'll keep his word."
+
+Ben was at once anxious to go along, but this was not yet to be, and
+he was forced to sit at a window of the hospital and see his regiment
+march by with colors flying gayly and all "the boys" eager for
+another contest. The members of his own company gave him a cheer as
+they passed. "You'll soon be with us again, captain," cried one. "We
+won't forget you! Hurrah!" and on they marched, with a lieutenant from
+Company A leading them, and with Gilbert and Major Morris and many old
+friends with the regiment. Ben watched them out of sight, and heaved a
+long sigh over the fact that he was not of their number. But there was
+still plenty of fighting in store for the young captain, and many
+thrilling and bitter experiences in the bargain.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+AN ADVENTURE ON THE PASIG RIVER
+
+
+"Hurrah, Luke! I reckon I am going to see a bit of fighting at last."
+
+It was Larry who spoke, as he rushed up to his old friend, Luke
+Striker, now one of the gun captains on board the _Olympia_. It was
+the day after the young tar had paid the visit to Ben.
+
+"Fighting? where?" demanded the Yankee gunner. "Do you mean to say as
+how the _Olympia_ is goin' to do some scoutin' alongshore, lad?"
+
+"No, the ship is going to remain right where she is. But General
+Lawton is going to take an expedition up the Pasig River from San
+Pedro Macati to the Laguna de Bay, and some of the sailors are going
+along to help manage the cascos and other boats. I just applied for a
+place, along with Jack Biddle, and we both got in."
+
+"And why can't I get in?" returned Luke, eagerly. "This here
+everlastin' sitting still, doin' nuthin', is jest a-killin' of me."
+
+"You might apply, although there are already more volunteers than they
+want," answered Larry. He told his old friend how to make the
+necessary application, and soon Luke had joined the expedition; and
+the three friends hastened ashore and on board a shallow river
+transport, which was to take them and a number of others up to San
+Pedro Macati.
+
+The brief journey to the latter-named village was without incident.
+Here Larry found assembled a body of about thirteen hundred soldiers,
+infantry and cavalry, and with them two hundred picked sharpshooters,
+and two guns manned by members of the regular artillery. Owing to the
+sickness of the commanding general, General Lawton took personal
+charge of the expedition.
+
+No man was better fitted for fighting in the Philippines than Major
+General Henry W. Lawton, who had but lately arrived in the islands,
+and who was destined to die the death of a hero upon the firing line.
+Of commanding appearance, being six feet three inches in height and
+weighing over two hundred pounds, he was a soldier by nature and a
+natural leader among leaders. He had fought all through the great
+Civil War with much credit to himself, and it was he who, during the
+great Apache Indian uprising, followed the crafty Geronimo through
+mountain and over desert for a distance of nearly fourteen hundred
+miles, and at last caused him to surrender. For this, it is said, the
+Indians called him "Man-who-gets-up-in-the-night-to-fight," and they
+respected him as they respected few others.
+
+With the outbreak of the war with Spain General Lawton was in his
+element, and when the army of occupation sailed for Santiago he was
+with them; and it was this same Lawton who stormed El Caney and
+captured it, as related in "A Young Volunteer in Cuba." When General
+Shafter wanted to call Lawton away from El Caney, after the troops had
+been fighting many hours, Lawton sent him word, "I can't stop--I've
+got to fight," and went forward again; and in less than an hour the
+Spanish flag at the top of the hill was down, and Old Glory had taken
+its place.
+
+General Lawton was addressing several members of his staff when Larry
+first saw him at San Pedro Macati. He stood, war map in hand, in front
+of the river landing, a conspicuous figure among the half-dozen that
+surrounded him.
+
+"He's a fighter--you can see that," whispered Larry to Luke, who stood
+beside him. "Just look at that square-set jaw. He won't let up on the
+rebels an inch."
+
+"Jest the kind we're a-wantin' out here," responded the Yankee gunner.
+"The more they force the fightin' the sooner the war will come to an
+end. He's coming toward us," he added, as General Lawton stepped from
+out of the circle around him.
+
+"You are from the _Olympia_, I believe?" he said, addressing Luke.
+
+"Yes, general," replied the old gunner, touching his forelock, while
+Larry also saluted. "We volunteered for this expedition."
+
+"You look all right, but--" General Lawton turned to Larry. "I'm
+afraid you are rather young for this sort of thing, my lad," he went
+on.
+
+"I hope not, sir," cried Larry, quickly. "I've seen fighting before."
+
+"He was in the thickest of it when we knocked out Admiral Montojo,
+general," interposed Luke. "You can trust him to do his full share,
+come what may."
+
+"Oh, if he was in that fight I guess he'll be all right," responded
+General Lawton, with a grim sort of a smile. And he turned away to
+overlook the shipping of some ammunition on one of the tinclad
+gunboats which was to form part of the expedition.
+
+The troops were speedily on the cascos, which were to be towed by
+several steam launches and escorted by three tinclads. Although Larry
+and his friends did not know it till several hours later, the
+destination was Santa Cruz, a pretty town, situated on a slight hill
+overlooking the placid waters of the Laguna de Bay. The general's plan
+was to reach the lake by nightfall, and steal over the silent waters
+in the dark until the vicinity of Santa Cruz was gained, in hopes that
+the garrison might be caught "napping," as it is called.
+
+For the time being the sailors were separated one from another, each
+being put in charge of a casco, the shallow rowboats being joined
+together in strings of four to six each, and pulled along with many a
+jerk and twist by the puffing little launches, which at times came
+almost to a standstill.
+
+"We won't reach the lake by sunrise, and I know it," remarked one of
+the soldiers to Larry, who stood in the bow of the casco with an oar,
+ready to do whatever seemed best for the craft. "We've a good many
+miles to go yet."
+
+At that instant the casco ahead ran aground in the shallow river, and
+Larry had all he could do to keep his craft from running into it. As
+the two boats came stem to stern one of the soldiers in the craft
+ahead called out to those behind:--
+
+"Say, Idaho, do you know where we are bound?"
+
+"Bound for Santa Cruz, so I heard our captain remark," answered one of
+the soldiers in Larry's boat. "Got any tobacco, North Dakota?"
+
+"Nary a pipeful, wuss luck," was the response; and then the line
+straightened out as the casco ahead cleared herself from the mud, and
+the two boats moved apart once more.
+
+"Are we really going to Santa Cruz?" questioned Larry, as soon as he
+got the chance. "I thought we were bound for the north shore of the
+lake."
+
+"I can only tell you what I heard the captain say," answered the
+soldier, with a shrug of his shoulder. "General Lawton ain't blowing
+his plans through a trumpet, you know."
+
+"I hope we do go to Santa Cruz," mused Larry, as he thought of what
+had been said of Benedicto Lupez. "And if we take the town I hope we
+take that rascal, too."
+
+The best laid plans are often upset by incidents trifling in
+themselves. It was the dry season of the year, and the Pasig River,
+usually broad and turbulent, was now nothing better than a muddy,
+shallow creek, winding and treacherous to the last degree. As night
+came on the expedition found itself still in the stream and many miles
+from the lake, and here cascos and launches ran aground and a general
+mix-up ensued.
+
+"Hullo, what have we run up against now?" growled the lieutenant in
+charge of the soldiers in Larry's boat. "Can't you keep out of the
+mud, Jackie?"
+
+"I'm doing my best," panted the youth, as he shoved off for at least
+the fourth time. "With the lines forward and aft pulling one way and
+another it's rather difficult to keep to the channel, especially in
+the dark."
+
+"Oh, you're only a boy and don't understand the trick," growled the
+lieutenant, who was in a bad humor generally. "I don't see why they
+let you come along."
+
+"Our boat is doing about as well as any of them," answered Larry,
+bound to defend himself. "Two boats are aground to our left and three
+behind us."
+
+"See here, don't talk back to me! You tend to business and keep us out
+of the mud," roared the lieutenant, in worse humor than before.
+
+An angry retort arose to Larry's lips, but he checked it. "A quarrel
+won't do any good," he thought. "But what a bulldog that fellow is--as
+bad as Quartermaster Yarrow, who caused me so much trouble on the trip
+out here."
+
+On went the cascos once more, around a tortuous bend and past a bank
+fringed with bushes and reeds. The mosquitoes were numerous, likewise
+the flies, and everybody began to wish the journey at an end.
+
+"We'd better make a charge on the insects," growled one old soldier.
+"They are worse nor the rebels ten times over," and, just then, many
+were inclined to agree with him. Tobacco was scarce or smoking would
+have been far more plentiful than it was.
+
+Midnight came and went, and found the expedition still some distance
+from the lake. A few of the soldiers were sleeping, but the majority
+remained wide awake, fighting off the marshland pests, and aiding in
+keeping the cascos and launches from running high and dry in the mud.
+Had it not been for the tinclads it is doubtful if the Laguna de Bay
+would have been gained at all by more than half of the craft composing
+the turnout. But they came to the rescue time and again, and so the
+expedition crawled along, until, at four o'clock, the clear sheet of
+water beyond was sighted.
+
+They were making the last turn before the lake was gained when the
+casco ahead of that steered by Larry went aground once more, dragging
+Larry's craft behind it. The youth did all he could to back water, but
+in vain, and once more they heard the unwelcome slish of mud under
+their bottom.
+
+"Now you've done it again!" howled the lieutenant, leaping up from his
+seat. "You numskull! give me that oar." And he tried to wrench the
+blade from Larry's hand.
+
+"It was not my fault," began the youth, when the officer forced the
+blade from him and hurled him back on one of the soldiers. Then the
+lieutenant tried to do some poling for himself, and got the oar stuck
+so tightly in the mud that he could not loosen it.
+
+Burning with indignation, Larry felt himself go down in a heap, and
+at once tried to get up again. At the same time the soldier beneath
+him gave him a shove which pitched him several feet forward. He landed
+up against the lieutenant with considerable force, and in a twinkle
+the officer went overboard, head first, into the water and mud where
+the casco had stuck fast.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE GAP IN THE FIRING LINE
+
+
+"Hullo, Lieutenant Horitz has fallen overboard!"
+
+"Pull him out of the mud, before he smothers or drowns!"
+
+Such were some of the cries which arose among the soldiers that filled
+the casco. Then Larry was shoved back, and two of them caught hold of
+the legs of the man who had disappeared, as for an instant they showed
+themselves. There was a "long pull, a strong pull, and a pull
+altogether," and up came the lieutenant, minus his hat and with his
+face and neck well plastered with the black ooze of the river bottom.
+
+For a moment after he sank on the seat that was vacated to receive him,
+he could not speak. One of the soldiers handed him a handkerchief, and
+with this he proceeded to clear his eyes and ears, at the same time
+puffing vainly to get back his breath. At last he cleared his throat
+and glared angrily at Larry.
+
+"You--you young whelp!" he fumed. "You--you knocked me over on
+purpose!"
+
+"No, sir, I did not," answered the young tar, promptly. "One of the
+soldiers shoved me up against you."
+
+"I don't believe you," roared the unreasonable one, as he continued to
+clean himself off. "You shall pay dearly for this assault, mark me!"
+
+"Didn't you shove me?" asked Larry, appealing to one of the soldiers.
+
+"I shoved you off of my neck, yes," answered the enlisted man. "But I
+didn't throw you into Lieutenant Horitz. You did that yourself."
+
+"Of course he did it himself," said another soldier, who did not wish
+to see his tent-mate get into trouble. "You had it in for the
+lieutenant ever since he first spoke to you."
+
+"I shall report you the first chance I get," growled Lieutenant
+Horitz. "I reckon you'll find that General Lawton won't allow any such
+disgraceful conduct while he is in command."
+
+"What's the row back there?" came out of the darkness. "Hurry up and
+get afloat, or we'll cut the rope and leave you to shift for
+yourselves."
+
+"Our officer was just shoved overboard," answered Snapper, the
+soldier who had given Larry the unlucky push. "And we've lost our
+oar."
+
+"No, I have the oar," put in Larry, making a clutch into the water for
+the article just as it was about to float out of reach. He leaped into
+the bow once more, and began to work vigorously, and in a few seconds
+they were again afloat.
+
+Fortunately for the lieutenant the night was warm, so he suffered no
+inconvenience so far as his wet clothing was concerned. But it was no
+mean task to clean both himself and his uniform, and what to do for
+another hat he did not know. He would have taken Larry's headgear had
+that article been anyway suitable, but it was not.
+
+It must be confessed that Larry felt thoroughly ill at ease. That
+there was trouble ahead went without saying, and he half wished
+himself safe back on the _Olympia_. "He'll make out the worst case he
+can against me," he thought. "And his men will back him up in all he
+says." Yet he felt that he was guilty of no intentional wrong-doing,
+and resolved to stand up for himself to the best of his ability.
+
+The lieutenant had learned one lesson--that he knew no more about
+handling the casco than did Larry, if as much, and, consequently, he
+offered no more suggestions as to how to run the craft. But he kept
+muttering under his breath at the youth, and Larry felt that he was
+aching to "get square."
+
+It was early dawn when the casco turned into the lake proper. As the
+sun came up it shed its light on one of the prettiest sheets of water
+Larry had ever beheld. The lake was as smooth as a millpond, and
+surrounded with long stretches of marshland and heavy thickets of
+tropical growth. Fish were plentiful, as could be seen by gazing into
+the clear depths below, and overhead circled innumerable birds.
+Villages dotted the lake shore at various points, but these the
+expedition gave a wide berth, setting out directly for Santa Cruz,
+still several miles distant, behind the hill previously mentioned.
+
+If it had been General Lawton's intention to attack the town from in
+front in the dark, that plan had now to be changed, and the expedition
+turned toward shore at a point at least three miles from the town
+proper.
+
+But even here the rebels could be seen to be on the alert, and a
+rapid-firing gun was put into action and directed along the lake
+front. The gun was manned by some men from the _Napadan_, and did such
+wonderful execution that soon the insurgent sentries were seen to be
+fleeing toward the town at utmost speed. Then a small detachment from
+some brush also retreated, and the coast was clear.
+
+It was no easy matter to land, as the water here was shallow and the
+cascos had to be poled along over the soft mud. The sharpshooters were
+the first ashore, and they soon cleared a spot for the others. But a
+few of the rebels were "game," and as a result one man was wounded,
+although not seriously. The cavalry remained on the boats, to land
+closer to the hill later on.
+
+The landing had consumed much valuable time, and it was now after
+noon. A hasty meal was had, and then the column moved off, spreading
+out in fan shape as it advanced, the sharpshooters to the front and
+the rear, and a number of special scouts on the alert to give the
+first warning of danger. Soon the scouts in front came back with the
+news that the insurgents were forming in front of our troops and that
+Santa Cruz and its garrison seemed thoroughly aroused to the danger
+which threatened.
+
+"Forward, boys!" was the cry. "The more time we give them, the better
+they will be prepared to meet us. Forward without delay!" And the
+"boys" went forward with a wild hurrah, for everything promised well,
+and they were much pleased to have General Lawton lead them, even
+though they had no fault to find with their other commanders.
+
+The first skirmish began on the extreme right. Some rebels had found
+their way to a hill behind the town, and they began the attack from a
+patch of wild plantains, thickly interlaced with tropical vines. Up
+the hill after them dashed the right wing, and the sharp rattle of
+musketry resounded upon both sides for the best part of half an hour.
+Then the rebels broke and ran, and in their eagerness our troops
+followed them until a point less than two miles from Santa Cruz was
+gained. Here the insurgents scattered, and could not be rounded up,
+and the right wing fell back, to unite with the main body of the
+expedition. But the woods were thick, the ground new to the Americans,
+and in the gathering darkness it was several hours before the firing
+line was compact once more. Then the expedition rested for the night.
+
+Larry had landed with the soldiers, and, as the other cascos came up,
+he was speedily joined by Luke Striker and Jack Biddle.
+
+"I wonder what part we air to take in this comin' mix-up?" queried
+Luke.
+
+"Like as not they will leave us here to mind the boats," replied
+Larry. "I can tell you that I am rather sorry I came along," he added
+soberly.
+
+"Sorry!" ejaculated Jack Biddle. "Surely, Larry, ye ain't afraid--"
+
+"No, I'm not afraid," interrupted the youth. And then he told of the
+scene in the casco, and of what Lieutenant Horitz had said. When he
+had finished, Jack cut a wry face and Luke uttered a low whistle.
+
+"You've run up agin a rock fer sartin, Larry," remarked Luke. "I
+reckon he can make things look putty bad for ye if he's of a mind to
+do it."
+
+"Keep quiet an' say nuthin', an' he may forgit all about it," was Jack
+Biddle's advice.
+
+The boats having been cared for, the sailors followed the soldiers
+through the field and into the woods. All told there were twenty-five
+jackies, and by common consent they formed themselves into a company
+of their own, with a petty officer named Gordell at their head.
+Gordell went to General Lawton for directions, and was told to follow
+the volunteers until given further orders. Each sailor was armed with
+a pistol and a ship's cutlass.
+
+The march was a hot one, but Larry was now getting accustomed to the
+tropics and hardly minded this. The little company advanced with
+caution, nobody desiring to run into an ambush. Soon the firing on the
+right reached their ears, and they knew that some sort of an
+engagement was on. Then came a halt, and presently the darkness of
+night fell over them; and they went into camp beside a tiny
+watercourse flowing into a good-sized stream which separated the
+expedition from the outskirts of Santa Cruz.
+
+Supper disposed of, Larry and Luke Striker took a stroll forward, to
+find out what the firing line was really doing and if the insurgents
+were in front in force. "We may have a bigger fight on hand nor any of
+us expect," suggested the old Yankee gunner.
+
+"You can trust General Lawton not to run his head into the lion's
+mouth," returned Larry. "A soldier who has whipped the Apache Indians
+isn't going to suffer any surprise at the hands of these Tagals, no
+matter how wily they are."
+
+"Don't be too sure o' thet, Larry. The best on us make mistakes
+sometimes," answered the Yankee, with a grave shake of his head. But
+General Lawton made no mistake, as we shall speedily see.
+
+As has been said, the right wing had become detached from the main
+body of the expedition during the fight on the hill back of Santa
+Cruz. The firing line of this wing had not yet united with the centre,
+consequently there was a gap of over a quarter of a mile in the front.
+Had the Tagalogs known of this they might have divided the expedition
+and surrounded the right wing completely, but they did not know, so
+the temporary separation did no damage to the soldiers. But that gap
+brought a good bit of trouble to Larry and his friend.
+
+On and on went the pair, down a narrow road lined on either side with
+palms and plantains and sweet-smelling shrubs. From the hollows the
+frogs croaked dismally, and here and there a night bird uttered its
+lonely cry, but otherwise all was silent.
+
+"Humph, they've pushed the firing line ahead further than I thought,"
+remarked Luke, after half a mile had been covered. "Here's a small
+river. Do ye reckon as how they went over thet, lad?"
+
+"It must be so," answered the boy. "Certainly, we haven't been
+challenged."
+
+Crossing the rude bridge, they found that the road made a sharp turn
+to the southward. Beyond was a nipa hut, back of which burnt a small
+camp-fire. Both hut and fire seemed deserted.
+
+"They have cleaned the rebels out from there," said Larry. "Come
+ahead," and they continued on their way, little dreaming of the trap
+into which they were walking.
+
+The nipa hut passed, they came to a tall fence built of bamboo stalks,
+sharpened at the tops and bound with native rope-vine. Farther on
+still were a dozen shelters, and here could be seen several women and
+children sitting in the doorways.
+
+"Perhaps they can give us some information," said Larry, as they
+approached the natives. As soon as they saw the Americans the children
+shrieked dismally and rushed out of sight. But the women held their
+ground, feeling that they would not be molested.
+
+"See anything of our soldiers?" demanded Luke of the women, but one
+and all shook their heads. "No Englees talk," mumbled one, meaning
+they did not understand or speak our tongue.
+
+The natives' manner made Larry suspicious, and he glanced around
+hurriedly. As he did so there was a click of a trigger from behind
+the bamboo fence.
+
+"_Americanos_ surrender," came in bad English from back of the fence.
+"Surrender quick, or we shoot both dead on the spot!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+AN ENCOUNTER AT THE RIVER
+
+
+To say that both Larry and his old friend were surprised at the sudden
+demand which had been made upon them would be to put the truth very
+mildly. They had been of the firm belief that the insurgents had
+retreated, and to find themselves in a "reg'lar hornet's nest," as
+Luke afterward expressed it, dumfounded them.
+
+"Do you surrender, or not?" came the words, after an awkward pause.
+
+It was dark about the huts, yet not so dim but that they could see the
+barrels of several Mauser rifles thrust toward them. The sight made
+Larry shiver, for he had never before met the rebel soldiers at such
+close quarters.
+
+"We're in a box," muttered Luke. "Somethin' wrong somewhar--our
+soldiers didn't come this way, ye kin reckon on thet."
+
+"I move we run for it," whispered Larry. "If they take us prisoners--"
+He did not finish, but his silence was more impressive than mere words
+would have been. He had heard many stories of terrible cruelty
+practised by the insurgents on their prisoners, and whether these
+tales were true or not, they had had their full effect on both him
+and his shipmates.
+
+"Where are ye goin' to run to, lad? We don't want to run an' be shot
+down in cold blood."
+
+"Get in front of me and take to the woods opposite, Luke," was the
+hurried reply. "Here goes! I don't think they'll fire now!"
+
+As Larry concluded, he sprang to the side of one of the native women
+standing nearest to him. Before the woman could resist, he had her in
+his arms behind him and was running off as speedily as the weight of
+his living load permitted. Seeing this, Luke scuttled off before, and
+away they went for the woods, not twenty yards distant.
+
+A howl arose on the night air, and one gun went off, but the bullet
+did no damage. Then the leader of the rebels was heard, calling to his
+men not to fire, for fear of killing the woman, who chanced, by good
+luck, to be a close relative; for the soldiers behind the bamboo fence
+were part of a home guard brought out that very afternoon to defend
+the road and Santa Cruz.
+
+The woman on Larry's back shrieked in terror and clawed at his neck
+and hair, causing him considerable pain. But he held his burden tight
+until the shelter of the trees was gained, when he let her slip to the
+ground and darted after Luke, who was running with all the speed of
+his lanky limbs.
+
+It was pitch dark in the jungle, and the pair had not advanced more
+than a hundred yards when they found themselves going down into a
+hollow which both felt must lead to a dangerous swamp, or morass, for
+the island of Luzon is full of such fever-breeding places.
+
+"Go slow, lad," whispered Luke, as he caught Larry by the hand. "We
+don't want to land out o' the fryin'-pan into the fire."
+
+They both became silent and listened attentively. At a distance they
+heard the insurgents coming on slowly and cautiously, spreading out as
+they advanced. Probably they knew the topography of the country and
+meant to surround the hollow completely.
+
+"They are coming, that's sure," whispered Larry, and clutched his
+pistol. "I wonder if we can't get away from them by climbing a tree."
+
+"We can--if they ain't a-followin' the trail putty close," answered
+his companion.
+
+They began to search around for a tree, and in doing so came to
+several large rocks, much over-grown with trailing vines. There was an
+opening between two of the rocks, and Luke slipped into this, hauling
+Larry after him.
+
+"Jest as good as a tree, an' mebbe better," he whispered, as he
+rearranged the vines over the opening.
+
+The hiding-place was not a large one, and Larry felt very much like a
+sardine in a box as he crouched close to his Yankee friend. The vines
+covered the opening completely, yet they remained on guard, each with
+his finger on the trigger of his weapon, resolved, if the worst came
+to the worst, to fight the best they knew how before surrendering.
+
+The Filipinos were evidently puzzled, for they had come to a halt and
+made not the slightest noise. Possibly they were listening for some
+sound from those they were pursuing, but if so, none came, for Luke
+clapped his hand warningly over Larry's mouth, and the youth
+understood and remained as motionless as a statue.
+
+Five minutes went by--to the boy they seemed an age--and then the
+rebels came on again, halting every few steps to make sure of their
+ground. Three passed close to the rocks, so close in fact that Larry
+and Luke could have shot them down without trouble. But this would
+have given the alarm to the entire party, and neither the boy nor the
+man wanted to shed blood unless it became absolutely necessary.
+
+At last the Filipinos had left the rocks behind and were circling
+around the swamp at the bottom of the hollow. "Now is the time to give
+'em the slip," whispered Luke, and crawled once more into the open.
+Larry followed, and both hurried away from the vicinity with all
+possible speed. It was the last seen or heard of the party who had so
+unexpectedly blockaded their progress on the highway.
+
+The jungle at the top of the hill was as dense as that below, and the
+pair had not proceeded far before they found themselves in a veritable
+tangle of bushes and vines. The bushes were of the thorny kind
+peculiar to this locality, and more than once Larry found himself
+caught and held as if in a vice.
+
+"My clothing will be in tatters if this keeps on," he panted, as he
+cut himself loose with difficulty. "Did you ever see such a thicket!"
+
+"We missed it when we started out to-night," returned Luke, gravely.
+"We've gone astray o' the firm' line and everything else, to my way o'
+lookin' at it."
+
+Bad as was their situation, they felt it would be worse with the
+coming of daylight. "We must get out of the enemy's territory before
+the sun rises," said Larry. "If we don't, we'll have no show at all."
+
+But getting out was not easy; indeed, the farther they advanced, the
+more difficult did it seem to become, until both came to the
+conclusion that they had missed their bearings entirely, and were
+lost. "And can't even see the stars to read 'em," groaned Luke.
+"Larry, we might as well make the best of it, and wait for daylight."
+
+But the youth demurred and insisted on going ahead. "We're bound to
+strike something soon," he said, and did, immediately afterward. It
+was a log lying on the edge of an incline, and down he pitched, and
+log and lad rolled over and over, with Luke following, to bring up
+with a loud splash in the river below.
+
+The force of their fall took them under the surface of the stream, and
+in the struggle to save themselves both lost their cutlasses. But, as
+old readers know, each could swim well, and they speedily came up and
+struck out for the most available landing-place, which was on the
+opposite bank.
+
+"_Alto!_" came the sudden cry, in Spanish. "Halt!" And now a sentry
+appeared from behind a pile of cord-wood lying but a short distance
+away.
+
+[Illustration: "Alto!" came the sudden cry.--_Page 47._]
+
+"Discovered again," muttered Luke, and felt for his pistol. "Soaked!"
+he muttered, in disgust.
+
+The cry of the rebel on guard had given the alarm to several others,
+and in a twinkling Larry and the old Yankee tar found themselves
+confronted by an even more determined crowd than that encountered on
+the road. With the water behind them, escape was out of the question,
+for a jump back into the river would have courted a fire which must
+have resulted in death.
+
+"_Americanos!_" muttered one of the rebels, drawing closer. "And
+sailors, not soldiers," he added, in his native tongue. "Where did you
+come from?"
+
+Larry and Luke shook their heads. "Talk United States and we'll speak
+to you," said the old sailor.
+
+"You gif up?" demanded an under officer, as he pushed his way forward,
+with his pistol covering Larry's heart.
+
+"Ain't nuthin' else to do, I reckon," replied Luke, before Larry could
+answer. He was afraid the boy might be rash and try running away
+again.
+
+"Throw down de pistoles, den," muttered the Tagal, with an ugly
+frown.
+
+Down went the weapons on the ground, and then two of the rebels
+advanced to search them. They found nothing of special value excepting
+the pair's jack-knives, and these were confiscated and turned over to
+the officer in command.
+
+The prisoners were then told to march up the river shore to a road
+leading into Santa Cruz. With their hands bound tightly behind them,
+they were placed in charge of a detail of four Filipinos, who were
+instructed to take them without delay before the general in charge of
+the city's defences.
+
+"They may hold information of importance," said the under officer.
+"Do not delay a minute;" and off went the crowd, the soldiers prodding
+the prisoners with their bayonets whenever Larry and Luke did not walk
+fast enough to suit them.
+
+The course taken was through a narrow and exceedingly dirty street. It
+was after midnight, yet the expected attack of the Americans had kept
+all the inhabitants awake. The prisoners were jeered at repeatedly,
+and at one point were covered with a shower of mud and stale
+vegetables. The onslaught might have been more serious had not the
+soldiers interfered.
+
+"Get back, you dogs," shouted the leader, a little Tagal scarcely five
+feet in height, but with an air of magnificent importance. "These men
+are to go before the general, and at once!" And much abashed the
+natives fell back, and the prisoners were molested no further.
+
+It would naturally be supposed that the general in command would be
+found at the front at such a time, when an attack on the city was but
+a matter of a few hours. Instead, however, General Bamodo was found at
+one of the government buildings, calmly smoking a cigar, and
+conversing with several native business men.
+
+"Spies, eh?" he queried, when the guard had told him about the
+prisoners. "Bring them in immediately."
+
+Larry and Luke were told to enter the room, and did so, their still
+wet clothing forming little puddles at their feet. The guards stood
+beside and behind them. General Bamodo eyed them critically. He spoke
+no English, and so called in an interpreter.
+
+"Where are you from?" demanded the interpreter, presently, after a few
+words with his superior.
+
+"We are from the warship _Olympia_," answered Luke, briefly.
+
+"You were sent here by General Otis as spies, not so?"
+
+"No, sir, we are jest plain, everyday sailors."
+
+"Then what brought you here?" demanded the interpreter, after
+translating their words to General Bamodo.
+
+"We missed our way on the road," put in Larry, before Luke could
+answer. He thought it best not to say anything about accompanying
+General Lawton's expedition.
+
+"You must have missed it very much, General Bamodo says," growled the
+interpreter, after another consultation with his superior. "Santa
+Cruz is a good many miles from Manila harbor."
+
+To this Larry remained silent, and another talk in Spanish followed.
+Then a sudden shot from a distance caused General Bamodo to leap to
+his feet and dash down his cigar.
+
+"Take them to the prison--I will examine them later on," he said, in
+Spanish, and hurried away.
+
+A few minutes later Larry and his Yankee friend were marched off, this
+time to a stone building several squares away. Here they were taken
+inside, thrust into a cell, the iron-barred door was locked upon them,
+and they were left to their fate.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+IN WHICH LUKE STRIKER IS WOUNDED
+
+
+The plan to surprise Santa Cruz had failed, yet General Lawton's
+command was just as eager as ever to press forward and do battle with
+the native garrison, of which the town on the Laguna de Bay boasted.
+It was thought the Filipino command could not be a strong one, and
+even if it had been the Americans would have gone ahead just the same,
+so accustomed were they to victory over their misguided foes.
+
+It was arranged that the centre and left wing of the infantry should
+move directly upon the town, while the right wing should swing around,
+to cut off the Filipinos' retreat, should they start such a movement.
+In the meantime, protected by a cross fire from the tinclads, _Laguna_
+and _Oeste_, the cavalry landed on the hill overlooking the bay, and
+began to do battle with the enemy's force in that territory, cutting
+its way over field and brush to the left wing as it swung closer to
+the river already mentioned several times. The cavalry developed a
+strong resistance which lasted for over an hour; but in the end the
+Filipinos were glad enough to fall back into the town proper.
+
+Out on the main road leading to the principal bridge over the river
+the sun was boiling hot, and many a soldier felt more like seeking
+shelter and resting than like pushing forward with his heavy gun and
+other equipments. But General Lawton was here and there, encouraging
+every one, and they pushed on until a sharp fire between the enemy and
+the advance guard told that a running fight, and perhaps a regular
+battle, would soon be at hand.
+
+"At them, my men!" cried the various commanders. "They'll run, no
+doubt of it. They haven't stood up against us yet!" And away went the
+long skirmishing line, and soon there was a steady crack and pop of
+guns and pistols as the Americans pushed on, catching many a poor
+Filipino who was too late in either running or throwing down his arms.
+A number surrendered, and these were promptly sent to the rear.
+
+Presently the river was gained, and here the Americans came to an
+unexpected halt. There was a long bridge to cross, and beyond was a
+barricade of stone and wood. Were the insurgents massed behind that
+barricade? If they were, to cross the bridge in column of fours or
+otherwise would mean a terrible slaughter.
+
+"Here goes!" sang out one petty officer, and made a dash forward,
+which was as reckless as it was daring. As he moved along the bridge
+several held their breath, expecting to see him go down at any
+instant. But then came a rush of first half a dozen, then a score, and
+then whole companies, and it was speedily seen that the barricade was
+practically deserted. The insurgents were hurrying into the town as
+hard as they could, with Uncle Sam's men after them, both sides
+keeping up a steady firing as they ran.
+
+In the meantime, soaked to the skin and utterly miserable over their
+capture, Larry and his Yankee friend had been thrust into the prison
+cell and left to themselves. After the door was locked and the jailer
+walked away, the youth uttered a long-drawn sigh.
+
+"Luke, we're in a pickle, this trip," he groaned. "What do you suppose
+they will do with us?"
+
+"Heaven alone knows, my lad," responded the old tar. "Bein' as how
+they ain't cannibals, I don't reckon they'll eat us up," and he smiled
+grimly.
+
+"They think we are spies."
+
+"Thet's so."
+
+"Do you know that they shoot spies--and do it in short order, too?"
+
+"And why shouldn't I know it, Larry? I've heard tell on it often
+enough. But they have got to prove we air spies first, ain't they?"
+
+"They'll do what they please. I believe half of these Filipinos think
+the Americans are nothing but cut-throats. They can't conceive that we
+should want to come here and govern them for their own good."
+
+"Because they would rather govern themselves, even if they made a mess
+of it, than be under anybody's thumb nail, Larry. Howsomever, thet
+ain't the p'int jest now. The p'int is, kin we git out o' here before
+they settle to do wuss with us?"
+
+"Get out? You mean break jail?"
+
+"Exactly. We don't want to stay here if we kin git out, do we?"
+
+"To be sure not." Larry leaped up from the bench upon which he had
+been resting and ran to the door. At this Luke smiled glumly and
+shook his head.
+
+"Ye won't go it thet way, lad--the guard locked it, I seen him do
+it,--and the lock is a strong one, too."
+
+Luke was right, as a brief examination proved. Then the boy turned to
+the window, an affair less than a foot square, having over it several
+iron bars set firmly into the stones. "No thoroughfare there," was his
+comment.
+
+The two next examined the floor, to find it of brick, and as solid as
+the walls. "Only the ceilin' left now," said Luke. "I reckon we might
+as well give it up. Even if we do git out, more'n likely a guard
+outside will shoot us down."
+
+But Larry was determined to test the ceiling, which was but a couple
+of feet over their heads. So he had his companion hold him for that
+purpose.
+
+"There is a loose board up there," he cried, as he was feeling his way
+along. "Hold me a little higher, Luke, and perhaps I can shove it
+up."
+
+The old sailor did as requested, and with a strong push Larry shifted
+one end of the plank above, so that it left an opening ten inches wide
+and several feet long. Catching a good hold he pulled himself to the
+apartment above, to find it stored with boxes and barrels containing
+old military uniforms and other army equipments, relics of Spanish
+rule.
+
+"Any way out up thar?" queried Luke. "If there is, we don't want to
+waste any time, ye know."
+
+"I'll tell you in a minute," replied Larry, in a low voice, and ran
+first to one end window of the storeroom and then the other. In front
+was the street, fast filling with soldiers. In the rear was a stable
+which just now seemed deserted. The several windows of the storeroom
+were all barred, but here the bars were screwed fast to wood instead
+of being set in stone.
+
+"I think there is a chance here," said the boy, coming back to the
+opening. "Here, give me your hand, and I'll help you up," and he bent
+down; and soon Luke stood beside him.
+
+"Think we can git out thet way, eh!" said the Yankee tar, surveying
+the prospect in the rear. "Well, I reckon it's worth workin' for,
+Larry. But the drop from the window, even if we pull away the bars--"
+
+"Here is a rope--we can use that," answered the boy, pointing out the
+article around several small boxes. While Luke pried away the bars of
+one of the rear windows he possessed himself of the rope, and tied it
+fast to a bar which was not disturbed. As soon as the opening was
+sufficiently large to admit of the passage of each one's body, Luke
+swung himself over the window-sill.
+
+"Come on," he cried softly, and slipped from view. Never had he gone
+down a ship's rope quicker, and never had Larry followed his friend
+with such alacrity. Both felt that life or death depended upon the
+rapidity of their movements.
+
+The ground was hardly touched by Luke when a Filipino boy appeared at
+the entrance to the stable. For an instant the youth stared in
+opened-mouthed astonishment, then he uttered a yell that would have
+done credit to an Indian on the war-path.
+
+"The jig's up!" cried the Yankee tar. "Come, Larry, our legs have got
+to save us, if we're to be saved at all."
+
+He leaped across the yard and for the corner of the stable, where he
+collided with a Tagal soldier, who was coming forward to learn what
+the yelling meant. Down went both the sailor and the guard; but the
+rebel got the worse of it, for he lay half stunned, while Luke was up
+in a trice. As the soldier fell, his gun flew from his hands, and
+Larry tarried just long enough to pick the weapon up.
+
+Behind the stable was a narrow, winding street, lined on either side
+with huts and other native dwellings, with here and there a barnlike
+warehouse. Into this street darted our two friends, and there paused,
+not knowing whether to move toward the wharves or in the opposite
+direction.
+
+"Look out!" suddenly yelled Larry, and dropped flat, followed by the
+Yankee tar. A sharp report rang out, and a bullet whistled over their
+heads, coming from the prison yard. On the instant Larry fired in
+return, and the prison guard disappeared as if by magic. Long
+afterward, Larry learned that he had hit the Tagal in the arm.
+
+There was now a general alarm throughout the prison, and the two
+escaped prisoners felt that any other locality would be better for
+them than the one they now occupied. "Let us try to find our
+soldiers," said Luke, and once again they started to run, this time up
+the road where, far away, they could make out a forest of some sort.
+Then came a second report, and Luke Striker staggered back, hit in the
+shoulder.
+
+"Luke! Luke, you are struck!" gasped Larry. His heart seemed to leap
+into his throat. What if his dearest friend had been mortally
+wounded?
+
+"I--I--reckon it--it ain't much!" came with a shiver. The sailor
+straightened himself up and started to run again. "They are after us
+hot-like, ain't they?"
+
+A turn in the road soon took them out of sight of the prison, and they
+breathed a bit more freely. But the strain was beginning to tell upon
+Luke, and watching him, Larry saw that he was growing deathly pale.
+
+"You can't keep this up, Luke," he said, and put out his arm to aid
+his friend. As he did so, the Yankee tar gave a short groan, threw up
+both hands, and then sank down in a heap at the boy's feet.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+THE RETREAT TO THE RICE-HOUSE
+
+
+Larry was greatly alarmed, not knowing but that his companion was
+about to die on his hands. Quickly he knelt at the Yankee's side, to
+learn that Luke had fainted away from loss of blood. The shoulder of
+his shirt and jacket were saturated through and through.
+
+"What shall I do?" the boy asked himself, and gazed hurriedly at the
+surroundings. To one side of the road were several nipa huts, to the
+other a long, rambling warehouse. The doorways of all the buildings
+stood open, and no one seemed to be in sight.
+
+As quickly as he could the youth took up his friend and staggered with
+his heavy burden to the warehouse, which was about half filled with
+rice. Entering the structure, he passed to a small apartment somewhat
+in the rear. Here there was a quantity of old sacking in a heap, and
+upon this rude couch Larry placed the unconscious form.
+
+The boy had been taught on shipboard just what to do in case of such
+an emergency, and now he worked as he never had before, for Luke was
+very dear to him, and the thought that his friend might die was
+horrible to contemplate. He prayed to Heaven that the old gunner's
+life might be spared to him.
+
+The wound was an ugly one; yet even to Larry's inexperienced eye it
+did not look as if it could be fatal, and the boy breathed a long sigh
+of relief as he bound it up. Then he went in search of water, and
+finding a well back of the warehouse brought a bucketful in and began
+to bathe Luke. Soon the sufferer stirred and opened his honest eyes
+wonderingly.
+
+"Why--er--how's this?" he stammered. "Did I--oh, I remember now!" And
+he sank back again.
+
+"Keep quiet," whispered the boy. He had heard voices coming toward the
+warehouse. "If you make a sound, it may be all up with both of us."
+
+The old tar breathed heavily and nodded. Throwing some sacking over
+the prostrate form, Larry slipped back into the main apartment of the
+warehouse. He still held the gun, but it was empty and could be used
+only as a club.
+
+Two men were approaching the warehouse, both tall, slim, and evidently
+of Spanish extraction. They were talking loudly and excitedly to one
+another; but as Larry understood but few words of Spanish, what they
+were saying was lost upon the boy.
+
+"I don't believe they are after us," thought the lad, when the
+strangers came to a halt just outside the warehouse. As they did so a
+long volley of rifle shots came from a distance, followed by another
+and then another. The shooting came from the centre of the town and
+made Larry's heart beat fast. "Our soldiers must be coming in," he
+thought. "Oh, I hope they make the town ours!"
+
+The shots appeared to disturb the two Spaniards greatly, for both
+clutched each other by the arm and looked thoroughly frightened.
+
+Presently an old woman came running out of one of the huts. She yelled
+at the two Spaniards in her own tongue and pointed at the warehouse.
+Evidently she had seen Larry and Luke, but had been afraid to expose
+herself.
+
+The strangers listened to the old woman with interest, then began to
+talk to each other. "Perhaps we can get some information, José," said
+one, in Spanish.
+
+"Perhaps we shall get a bullet," answered his companion, grimly.
+Nevertheless, he consented to enter the building, and both passed
+through the great doorway of the warehouse.
+
+Hardly knowing how to receive the newcomers, Larry stepped for a
+moment behind a bin of rice. But then, as the pair moved toward where
+Luke lay, he raised his gun threateningly.
+
+"Halt!" he called, as sternly as he could. "Halt, or I shall fire!"
+
+"We are betrayed!" roared one of the Spaniards, in his native tongue.
+"No shoot! no shoot!" he added, in broken English. "We mean you no
+harm."
+
+"Up with your hands, then," went on Larry, resolved to make the most
+of the situation, even though the gun was empty; and four hands went
+promptly into the air, for the two men before him were as cowardly as
+they were unprincipled.
+
+There was an awkward silence for several seconds, while boy and men
+surveyed each other. Larry lowered the gun slightly, but still kept
+his finger on the trigger. He noted that the newcomers appeared to be
+unarmed, although they had both knives and pistols hidden upon their
+persons.
+
+"You are an _Americano_ sailor, not so?" asked one of the Spaniards.
+
+"I am," was Larry's prompt reply. "Are you one of Aguinaldo's
+rebels?"
+
+"No, no! We are no rebels--we are peaceful Spanish gentlemen," put in
+the second Spaniard.
+
+"Do you belong here?"
+
+"I belong here," said the man who had first spoken. "My brother, he
+belongs at Manila."
+
+The brother mentioned shot an angry glance at the speaker. "Yes, I
+come from Manila," he said. "But I belong truly in Spain, being a
+merchant of Madrid."
+
+"Well, our war with you folks is over," said Larry, slowly, hardly
+knowing how to proceed. "If you are not going to help the rebels, you
+ought to help us. We are doing all we can for your prisoners out
+here," he added, meaning the Spaniards that were being held by the
+forces under General Aguinaldo--soldiers who were captured during the
+struggle between Spain and her Philippine colonies.
+
+"We can do but little," came with a shrug of the shoulders. "We are
+not armed, and if we help the _Americanos_, Aguinaldo says he will
+behead all the Spanish prisoners he is holding." Such a threat was
+actually made, but it is doubtful if the Filipinos would have been
+base enough to carry it out.
+
+"We came in here not to make trouble," went on the second Spaniard.
+"We came to learn what the firing means. Are the _Americanos_ coming
+here in force?"
+
+"They are."
+
+"Then Santa Cruz is doomed," groaned the Spaniard. He dropped his
+hands and began to pace the warehouse floor. "I shall lose much if the
+city falls. The rebels will burn all my property, for they hate me."
+
+"I trust not," answered Larry, his fear of the pair gradually leaving
+him. "Hark to that!" he added, as the rattle of guns was again heard.
+"Our men must be coming in fast, and orders are to save everything
+that can be saved. If the rebels--"
+
+He broke off short as a cry from Luke reached him. Running to the
+Yankee sailor he found Luke kicking out vigorously with his foot.
+
+"I couldn't keep still no longer, nohow!" burst out the old tar. "A
+plagued rat came right up and wanted to nibble my leg, hang him. Who's
+them air fellows out thar?"
+
+But the Spaniards had already followed Larry, and were now gazing at
+Luke in wonder. "Wounded, not so?" said one. "You were in the fight,
+then."
+
+"No, we escaped from the prison," answered Larry, simply. "We were
+captured during last night. I wish I was sure we'd be safe here until
+our soldiers come along." He turned to the old sailor again. "How do
+you feel now?"
+
+"Better, Larry, a heap better. But I ain't ready fer no more foot
+races jest yet."
+
+"Then we'll have to remain here. Or perhaps you had better remain here
+while I go scouting around and see if I can find some of our soldiers,
+or the ambulance corps."
+
+"An' what o' these gentlemen?"
+
+"We shall go, too," said one of the Spaniards. "Your friend will be
+safe here--if he keeps hidden under the sacks," he added.
+
+Waiting for the strangers to move first, Larry came behind them, still
+holding the gun as though the weapon were ready for use. The men had
+spoken fairly enough, yet there was that about them which did not
+please Larry in the least. "They are regular rascals, or else I miss
+my guess," thought the youth.
+
+The roadway still seemed deserted. But far off they could see the
+natives flying in several directions. Then from a distance came a
+cheer which Larry knew could only come from American throats.
+
+"Our soldiers must be over there," he said to the Spaniards. "Will you
+come with me?"
+
+The men hesitated, and consulted together in their native tongue. "I
+do not know what to say," said one, slowly, and began to follow Larry
+along the highway. Seeing this, the other came, too.
+
+Suddenly a loud shout came to them from a thicket back of some nipa
+huts, and instantly a band of insurgents burst into view, armed with
+guns and bolos. They were firing as they retreated, and made a stand
+on the opposite side of the road.
+
+"José Lupez!" cried one of the officers of the rebels, addressing one
+of the two Spaniards. "What do you here?"
+
+"And have I no right here?" asked the Spaniard, sharply.
+
+"Who is that with you?"
+
+"My brother, Benedicto, from Manila, who was visiting me."
+
+"He has betrayed us into the hands of the _Americanos_! If he--"
+
+The rest of the sentence was drown out in a volley of musketry, and
+two rebels were seen to fall. Some started to run, but others held
+their ground.
+
+Larry listened in amazement. He had heard the names José Lupez and
+Benedicto, and knew that the two Spaniards were brothers. Could this
+Spaniard, Benedicto Lupez, be the man who had made off with the money
+Braxton Bogg had stolen from the Hearthstone Saving Institution?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+A PRISONER OF THE FILIPINOS
+
+
+Larry had retreated to a small nipa hut standing close to the roadway,
+feeling that if the Americans were coming in that direction, they
+would soon be at hand to give Luke and himself aid.
+
+While the insurgents and the Spaniards were conversing, the latter had
+approached the hut, and now both followed the young sailor inside.
+
+"Is your name Benedicto Lupez?" demanded Larry, approaching the taller
+of the pair.
+
+"Yes," was the short response.
+
+"Then you are from Manila--you ran away from there about two weeks
+ago?"
+
+"Ha! what do you know of that?" demanded the Spaniard, eying Larry
+darkly.
+
+"I know a good deal about you," answered the youth, boldly. "After
+Braxton Bogg was arrested you made off with the money he had left at
+your residence."
+
+"'Tis false!" roared the Spaniard, but his face blanched even as he
+spoke. "I know nothing of that man or his money. I--I was deceived in
+him."
+
+"If that is so, why did you leave Manila in such a hurry?"
+
+"I--I wanted to help my brother, who was in trouble. I have not seen a
+dollar of Bogg's money. 'Tis he who still owes me for his board, black
+wretch that he was!" roared Benedicto Lupez, savagely.
+
+At these words Larry was startled. Was Lupez really telling the
+truth, and if so, where was the money that had wrecked the saving
+institution?
+
+"He didn't even pay his board?"
+
+"Not one piaster, boy,--nothing. And I thought him honest, or I would
+not have taken him in."
+
+"But his valise is gone, and the bands around the money--"
+
+"Were as he left them. I can swear I touched absolutely nothing,"
+answered Benedicto Lupez, earnestly.
+
+Larry was nonplussed. Had the Spaniard looked less of a villain, the
+young sailor would have been inclined to believe him. But that face
+was so crafty and calculating that he still hesitated.
+
+"Well, if you are innocent, you will not object to helping me rejoin
+our soldiers," he ventured.
+
+"I want nothing to do with the _Americanos_,--they mean to get me into
+trouble, even though I am innocent," growled Benedicto Lupez. "Come,
+José, we will go," he added to his brother, in their native language.
+
+His brother was already at the doorway. The shouting and firing
+outside was increasing. Leaping forward, Larry caught Benedicto Lupez
+by the arm.
+
+"You'll stay here," he began, when the Spaniard let out a heavy blow
+which hurled the young sailor flat.
+
+"I will not be held by a boy!" cried the man. "Let go, do you hear?"
+For Larry had caught him by the foot. The boy's hold was good, and in
+a trice Benedicto Lupez lay flat on his back. Then he rolled over and
+over and a fierce tussle ensued, which came to a sudden end when José
+Lupez leaped forward and kicked Larry in the head, rendering him
+partly unconscious.
+
+What followed was more like a dream than reality to the bruised youth.
+He heard a confused murmur of voices and a dozen or more shots, and
+then, as Benedicto Lupez and his brother ran off, several rebels
+swarmed into the hut, one stumbling over the lad's form and pitching
+headlong. This insurgent was about to knife Larry when he saw that the
+young sailor's eyes were closed, and that he was bleeding about the
+head.
+
+"_Un Americano_, and wounded," he said, speaking in the Tagalog
+dialect. "If he lives, he may make us a useful prisoner;" and a few
+minutes later Larry felt himself picked up and borne away, first in a
+man's arms and then on horseback. He tried to "locate" himself, but
+when he opened his eyes all went swimming before them, and he was glad
+enough to sink back once more and shut out the swirling sight.
+
+On and on, and still on went the rebels, some on foot and a few on
+their steeds. In front were a few wagons and caribao carts piled high
+with camping outfits, and also one or two light guns--all that had
+been saved from the garrison. General Lawton's attack had been a
+brilliant success, and Santa Cruz itself had surrendered with hardly
+the loss of a man to the Americans. The troops coming in did their
+best to round up the insurgents, but they had scattered in all
+directions and only a few were caught, and these swore that they were
+_amigos_, or friends, and had to be given their liberty. This
+pretending to be friends after they were routed was a great trick with
+thousands of the natives. They would come into the American camp under
+the pretext that they had just escaped from the insurgents who had
+threatened to kill them if they would not join Aguinaldo's forces.
+What to do with such people was one of the most difficult problems of
+the rebellion. They could not be placed under arrest, and yet that is
+what nine out of ten deserved.
+
+When Larry was once more himself he found that it was night. He was in
+a heap in a large casco which several Tagals were propelling with all
+speed across the Laguna de Bay. There were several other cascos in
+front and behind, all filled with natives with guns. The entire
+procession moved along in almost utter silence.
+
+The youth wanted to know where he was being taken, but no sooner did
+he open his mouth than one of the soldiers clapped a dirty hand over
+it and commanded him to be silent. As the soldier carried a bolo in
+his hand, Larry considered "discretion the better part of valor," and
+for the time being, held his peace.
+
+A swarm of mosquitoes soon told the boy that they were approaching a
+marsh, and presently the casco ran in between the reeds and under some
+high, overhanging tropical bushes. Then those on board leaped ashore,
+and the youth was made to follow them.
+
+A weary tramp over the marsh and then up a high hill followed. The
+hill was covered with wild plantains, monstrous ferns, and a species
+of cedar tree, all thickly interlaced with the ever present tropical
+vines, which crossed and recrossed the tortuous path the party was
+following. Overhead the stars shone down dimly, while the forest was
+filled with the cries of the birds, the chattering of an occasional
+monkey, and the constant drone and chirp of the innumerable insects.
+The path was uneven, and more than once Larry pitched into a hollow
+along with the Tagal who accompanied him and who never let go his hold
+on the youthful prisoner.
+
+At last they came to a halt before a series of rocks. Here there was a
+rude cave, partly concealed by bushes. As the party halted, several
+natives came from the cave to give them welcome. There was no doubt
+but that this was a rendezvous well known to the insurgents.
+
+"A prisoner is it?" said one of the natives, coming forward and
+holding up a torch of pitch. "A mere boy. Bah, Lanza, cannot you do
+better?"
+
+"He was with the soldiers who took Santa Cruz, and he wears the cap
+from a warship," replied Lanza. "It may be we can get more out of him
+than out of somebody older."
+
+"Well, perhaps; but I would rather you had brought in a man," was the
+brief response.
+
+The conversation was in the Tagalog dialect, and consequently Larry
+did not understand a word of it. The boy was made to march into the
+cave, which he found to be much larger than he expected. It was fully
+forty feet broad by sixty feet deep, and at the farther end a bright
+fire was burning, the blaze mounting high up in a natural chimney and
+rendering the surroundings as light almost as day.
+
+On coming to his senses, the youth's hands had been bound behind him,
+and now he was made to sit down with his back against a fair-sized
+tree trunk which had been dragged into the cave for firewood. A rope
+was passed around the log and this in turn was fastened to the cord
+about his wrists, thus making him a close prisoner.
+
+For several hours the rebels paid but scant attention to him, further
+than to furnish him a bowl of rice "pap," from which he might sup
+while it was held to his lips. They also gave him a drink of water,
+and one young rebel considerately washed the wound on his head, on
+which the blood had dried, presenting anything but a pleasant sight.
+
+As the hours went by the rebels around the cave kept increasing in
+numbers until there were several hundred all told. Those who came in
+last told of the complete downfall of Santa Cruz, but none of them had
+the least idea of what the Americans were going to do next. "Perhaps
+they will follow us to here," said one, grimly.
+
+"No, they know better than to follow us into the jungles and
+mountains," said the leader, Fipile. "If they did that, we could shoot
+them down like so many monkeys." They had still to learn the true
+character of the tireless general who had now taken up their trail,
+and who knew no such words as fear or failure.
+
+It was well toward noon of the day following when Captain Fipile came
+in to have a talk with Larry. He spoke English remarkably well, for he
+had spent several years of his life in San Francisco, and in Hong Kong
+among the English located at that port.
+
+"Your name, my boy," he said, sitting down beside the young tar. And
+when Larry had given it, he continued, "You were with the American
+troops who carried Santa Cruz?"
+
+"I was, sir, although I got into the city before they did."
+
+"Indeed, and how was that?" questioned the Filipino leader, and Larry
+told as much of his story as he deemed necessary.
+
+To the tale Captain Fipile listened with interest, even smiling when
+Larry told how he had broken out of the prison. "You did wonderfully
+well for a boy," he remarked. "A man could not have done more. What
+became of your friend?"
+
+"I left him at the warehouse. I hope he rejoined the soldiers."
+
+"And what of Señors Benedicto and José Lupez?"
+
+"I don't know what became of them."
+
+"I know this José Lupez fairly well, and I always thought him an
+honest man." Captain Fipile stroked his chin thoughtfully. "We are
+fighting you Americans, it is true, but we would not wish to shelter a
+thief who had run away from among you. We are above that, even though
+a good many of your countrymen will not give us credit for it."
+
+"We know that some of the Filipinos are honest enough," said Larry,
+hesitatingly. "What do you intend to do with me?" he went on, after a
+pause.
+
+"That remains to be seen. Would you like to join our army?"
+
+"Me? No, sir!" cried the youth, promptly.
+
+Captain Fipile laughed outright. "You are honest enough about it, I
+must say. How about giving us a little information? Will you object to
+that?"
+
+"I have given you considerable information already."
+
+"I mean military information."
+
+"I haven't anything to say on that point."
+
+"Can't I persuade you to tell me what you may happen to know?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"If I can get you to talk, it may go much easier with you while you
+remain our prisoner," went on the captain, suggestively.
+
+"I'm sorry, but I haven't anything to say."
+
+"Very well, then, Master Russell, if you are rather harshly treated in
+the future, remember you have only yourself to blame. As a general
+rule, we take prisoners only for the purpose of squeezing what
+information we can out of them."
+
+And thus speaking, Captain Fipile arose and quitted the cave, leaving
+Larry to his own reflections, which were more dismal than they were
+encouraging.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE ADVANCE INTO THE JUNGLE
+
+
+Santa Cruz had been taken, but there was still much to do around the
+shores of the Laguna de Bay to make it safe territory for the
+Americans to hold. From the city the rebels were pursued eastward, and
+a number of cascos and larger boats were captured. Inside of a few
+days Paete, Longos, Lumban, and several other villages, were visited
+by detachments of General Lawton's command, and the insurgents fled in
+each instance, leaving all behind them. Nearly a hundred who stopped
+to fight were either killed or wounded, and victory was entirely upon
+the side of the Americans.
+
+But now it was learned that the forces under General Aguinaldo and
+General Luna were concentrating once more to the north and east of
+Malolos, and much as he regretted the necessity, General Otis was
+compelled to order General Lawton and his command back to the
+territory above Manila. No garrisons could be spared for Santa
+Cruz, or the other places captured, so these settlements were
+allowed to fall once more into the hands of the enemy, after all the
+fortifications had been destroyed and the arms and munitions of war
+confiscated. It seemed a pity to leave these towns and villages after
+having once taken them, but to garrison them properly would, according
+to General Lawton's estimate, have taken thousands of soldiers.
+
+With the taking of Santa Cruz, the Americans marched through all the
+streets and by-ways, looking for lurking rebels and hidden arms, and
+in this search a squad of infantry came upon Luke Striker, who had
+propped himself up on the sacking in the warehouse and was making
+himself as comfortable as possible.
+
+"Hullo, sailor," cried the sergeant in charge of the squad. "Where did
+you come from?"
+
+[Illustration: "Hullo, sailor, where did you come from?"--_Page 82._]
+
+Luke's story was quickly told, and he begged the soldier to look for
+Larry, fearing that serious harm had befallen the lad. At once two
+soldiers were detailed to care for the old Yankee, while the rest went
+on a hunt which lasted far into the night.
+
+As we know, nothing was seen of Larry; but from a wounded and dying
+Filipino, the soldiers learned that the boy had been taken a prisoner,
+and must now be many miles away from the city. News of this reached
+Luke while he was in the temporary hospital opened up after the first
+fight, and the information made the old fellow feel as bad as did his
+wound.
+
+"If they've captured him, he's a goner, I'm afraid," he said to Jack
+Biddle, who had come in to help look after his messmate. "Poor Larry!
+What will his brother Ben say, when he hears of it?"
+
+"Better not tell him right away," suggested Biddle. "Give him a chance
+to get strong fust. Besides, Larry may give 'em the slip. He's putty
+cute, ye know."
+
+The news soon spread that Larry and several others were missing, and a
+description of the absent ones was given out. The next day one of the
+missing soldiers was found dead in the jungle, but nothing was learned
+of the others.
+
+"It serves the young sailor right," growled Lieutenant Horitz. "He
+knew too much for his own good." He had not forgotten the disaster on
+the river, and secretly he wished Larry all manner of ill-luck.
+During the rush through the woods the Lieutenant had tumbled and
+struck his nose on a stone. That member was much swollen and cut in
+consequence, and this put him in a worse humor than ever before.
+
+By the time the expedition was to return to Manila, Luke was able to
+walk around again, and he was put on one of the larger boats and Jack
+Biddle was detailed to look after him. The return to Manila was made
+without special incident, and two days later found Luke on board the
+_Olympia_ among all his old friends.
+
+But the Yankee tar was thoroughly out of sorts. "I wouldn't care for
+the wound at all, if only I knew Larry was safe," he was wont to say a
+dozen times a day. Barrow, Castleton, and all the boy's old friends
+were likewise troubled because of his strange disappearance.
+
+It was Jack Biddle who got shore leave and travelled up to Malolos to
+break the news to Ben. He found the acting captain of Company D just
+preparing to take his place in the command once more.
+
+"I'm glad to see you lookin' well, leftenant," he said, after shaking
+hands warmly. "Ye look almost as healthy as ye did on the voyage from
+Brooklyn to Manila."
+
+"And I feel almost as well," replied Ben. "The rest has done me a
+world of good. But what brought you up, Jack? Did Larry come with
+you?"
+
+"No, Larry didn't come," stammered the old tar, and looked down at the
+floor. "Fact is, leftenant, Larry--he--he couldn't come."
+
+"Couldn't come? Why, what's the matter?" cried Ben, quickly. "Is he
+sick?"
+
+"I reckon not--leas'wise, I don't know. Fact is, leftenant, none on us
+know. Ye see, he went upon thet Santa Cruz expedition--"
+
+"Yes, yes, I know that. And what of it? Was he--was he--" Ben could
+not utter the words which came to his mind.
+
+"No, he wasn't shot, thet is, so far as we know. But he's--well, he's
+missin', an' we can't find hide nor hair o' him anywhere. I might ez
+well tell ye fust ez last, though it cuts my heart to do it,
+leftenant." And Jack Biddle shook his head dubiously.
+
+It was a great shock to Ben, yet he stood it better than the old tar
+had expected. He asked immediately for details, and though he drank in
+every word his manner showed that his thoughts were far away.
+
+"I wish I had been along," he said bitterly. "If he wasn't killed, the
+Filipinos must have carried him off a pretty good distance. I wonder
+if General Lawton tried to find out anything under a flag of truce."
+
+"Everything that could be done was done--I have Captain Gaston's word
+on that," answered Jack Biddle. Captain Gaston and Ben were well known
+to each other.
+
+Ben sank down on a bench, and for several minutes said not a word, but
+the tears stood in his eyes, tears which he hastily dried that nobody
+might see them. Then Gilbert Pennington came in, to tell him that the
+regiment was ordered to move within the hour.
+
+"It's too bad!" declared the young Southerner. "But brace up, Ben,
+'While there is life there is hope,' and it's a pretty sure thing that
+he wasn't killed." And with this ray of comfort Ben had to be
+content.
+
+During the days that General Lawton had been in the vicinity of the
+Laguna de Bay, the regiment to which Ben and Gilbert belonged had not
+been idle. With a number of other troops they started for the town of
+Santa Maria, where they came upon the enemy and dislodged them with
+shells. The town, already in flames, was allowed to burn, and the
+Americans pursued the rebels quite a distance into the mountains, but
+failed to catch them.
+
+In the meantime the camp of the Third Artillery, situated some
+distance to the west of Malolos, was attacked. A fierce engagement in
+the swamps took place, and in the end the rebels were driven northward
+and began then to concentrate at Tarlac, which soon became one of
+their new capitals--they shifting the seat of government as often as
+it suited their convenience.
+
+It was now felt by General Otis and others in command that no time
+should be lost in an endeavor to round up the insurgents to the north
+of Malolos, who were the main support of the rebellion, although
+scattering bands were still operating to the south and southeast. The
+rainy season was but a few weeks off, and once this set in military
+operations would be much retarded, if not stopped altogether, for,
+taken as a whole, the roads throughout the Island of Luzon are bad,
+and heavy rains render them well-nigh impassable.
+
+In order to make the campaign against the rebels as effective as
+possible, General Otis decided to send out two columns, one under
+General MacArthur to strike out for Calumpit, and the second, under
+General Lawton, to take a route to the eastward, along the base of the
+hills leading to San Isidro. By this it was hoped, if the rebels at
+Calumpit were defeated and tried to take to the mountains, they would
+fall directly into Lawton's hands, and not only have to surrender but
+also give up all their war supplies.
+
+It was in the furtherance of this plan that General Lawton left Manila
+with his brigade and struck out for Novaliches which was gained after
+a small skirmish at Tuliahan River. From here the column moved to
+Norzagaray to await reënforcements which were coming in from Malolos
+and vicinity. To these reënforcements belonged the command to which
+Ben and Gilbert were attached.
+
+It had begun to rain, and those who understood tropical weather
+predicted that the wet season was at hand. Yet it was very hot, and
+the water which fell arose in clouds of steam on the road, rendering
+marching anything but comfortable.
+
+"Sure, an' it makes a man feel as if he was takin' a stame bath, so it
+does," remarked Dan Casey, as he swung along on the route step. "I
+don't know as I iver see it rain hot wather before, bedad," he added,
+as he wiped the perspiration from his sadly freckled face.
+
+During the day's march, which was trying to everybody, Ben was silent,
+wondering what had become of Larry and if he would ever again see his
+younger brother. When the command went into camp under the shelter of
+a grove of tall trees, both Gilbert and Major Morris visited his tent
+to comfort him.
+
+"He is not the only one who is missing," remarked the major of the
+first battalion. "So far I understand the warships have lost about a
+dozen men who went ashore and failed to return. And you know there are
+six men missing from our own regiment."
+
+"That is true, major," was the acting captain's answer. "But it's only
+when it's a close relative that the blow really comes home to one, you
+know."
+
+"I suppose that is true, captain. But don't be disheartened. It may
+be that your brother is already back at Manila."
+
+"I can't see what the rebels would do with him as a prisoner," said
+Gilbert. "They have to move around so lively that I can't see what
+they want with prisoners anyway."
+
+And so the talk ran on until it came time to retire. That night Ben
+slept but little, and it was not the rain or the aching of his wound
+that kept him awake either. He was bound to think of Larry constantly
+until something was heard of the missing lad.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+THE TAKING OF ANGAT
+
+
+"We are out for a fight to-day."
+
+It was Sergeant Gilmore who spoke, and he addressed Ben. The sergeant
+was still acting as first lieutenant of Company D, and it looked as if
+he might hold the position permanently. As for Ben, it was settled
+that he would be appointed permanent captain of the command as soon as
+the necessary papers could be made out.
+
+The regiment had joined General Lawton's command and was now in the
+vicinity of Angat, a pretty town, full of quaint buildings, and a
+place which, as yet, the rebellion had scarcely touched. But the
+insurgents had been developed in force by the sharpshooters in front,
+and now a constant rattle of musketry was heard, which made Ben's
+blood tingle as of old, when the cry had been, "On to Santiago!" and
+"On to Malolos!"
+
+"Yes, you are right, Gilmore," answered the young captain. "And I am
+not sorry. It will help us to forget the rain and our other
+discomforts." Ben did not say it would help him to forget about Larry,
+but that is what he meant.
+
+The regiment was soon advancing on the double-quick. It was spread out
+in skirmish order, and the route lay over what had once been a
+rice-field, but which was but little more than a sheet of dirty water
+four to eight inches deep. Here and there were holes, and into these
+some of the soldiers would sometimes step, thus getting an involuntary
+bath, much to their disgust.
+
+"It ain't all a picnic," remarked one of the unfortunates, as he
+leaped up out of a hole and shook himself like a big dog. "Folks at
+home as just read the newspaper accounts of the war don't know
+anything of what us fellows have to put up with. All they think we do
+is to rush forward, kill the enemy, and cover ourselves with glory.
+I'll wager some of 'em would put on a mighty sour face if they had to
+tramp ten or twenty miles in the mud and wet, carry a gun and other
+luggage, and hardly knowing when the next meal was going to turn up
+and what it was going to amount to."
+
+"Oh, you've got 'em bad, Bradner!" shouted a comrade. "Here, light my
+pipe and take a smoke. It will dry off your nose if nothing else." And
+Bradner took the pipe and was thankful that tobacco, at least, was
+still forthcoming.
+
+Half an hour later Ben received orders to take his company up to the
+firing line, and away went the command on the double-quick, with the
+young captain at the head. The rain had let up a bit, and the rebels
+could be seen making a stand behind a grove of half-wild plantains,
+where were located a score of nipa huts.
+
+"Run them out, boys!" shouted Ben, as they drew closer. "If we go at
+them with a rush we'll soon have them on the run!" And on swept the
+company, with orders to fire at will. Soon there was a constant
+cracking of rifles, and Ben and the other officers joined in with
+their pistols. The insurgents fired in return, and one man of the
+company fell back, hit in the arm.
+
+Just before the grove was gained there was a brook to cross. This was
+much swollen, and here a number of the soldiers came to a halt,
+fearing that fording was out of the question.
+
+"Don't stop!" came in a loud cry from Major Morris. "You can leap the
+stream easily enough. Come, I'm going!" And over he went with a
+bound, and a score of soldiers followed. A raking fire came from the
+nipa huts, but now the rebels were seen to be fleeing. The Americans
+answered the fire with volley after volley from their own guns, and
+the huts were surrounded as quickly as possible.
+
+"Captain Russell, you will take the trail to the left," said an
+orderly, dashing up. "Major Morris will rejoin you at the fork in the
+road."
+
+"The trail to the left," repeated Ben, and turned to his company.
+"Forward, boys,--left oblique!" he shouted, and on they went again,
+past the nipa huts and down a trail leading along the edge of a rich
+plantation. Several more huts were passed, but the inmates were
+nothing but women and children, and offered no resistance. Then at a
+distance could be seen a stone wall, as if the insurgents had
+endeavored to construct a rude fortification in a great hurry.
+
+The company was going at the stone wall pell-mell when Ben called a
+sudden halt. "To the right, boys, and come at the end of the wall,"
+were his orders, and the command swept around as desired.
+
+Bang! The report was hardly expected, and with it half a dozen of the
+stones composing the rude fortification gave way, disclosing a cannon
+made of a bored-out tree-trunk, wound round and round with telegraph
+wire stolen from the lines along the railroad. This wooden cannon had
+been heavily charged with cartridges, old nails, and bits of iron, and
+the first discharge rent the mouth into a dozen pieces.
+
+"That was a narrow shave!" cried Gilmore, as he and Ben looked around,
+to find all the company unharmed. "Who ever supposed the rascals would
+put up such a job as that on us?"
+
+"They'll do anything," replied the young captain. "But that isn't a
+new idea. Wooden cannons were used in the Civil War, so I've been
+told."
+
+With the discharge of the wooden gun, the rebels concealed behind the
+stone fortification had fled. The Americans now made after them, more
+"hot-footed" than ever, and the incessant crack of firearms was
+followed by many a groan and yell of pain as over a dozen Filipinos
+went down, three to their death.
+
+At the fork mentioned by Major Morris, Ben brought his company to a
+halt. All were panting for breath, for the brush at close quarters had
+put them on their mettle. The rest of the battalion soon came up, and
+the other battalions followed, from another road, and then the
+regiment, with the other troops, pushed on into Angat.
+
+Much to the astonishment of all, the beautiful town, with its
+century-old churches and quaint government buildings, was found
+practically deserted. The only inhabitants left were a few women and a
+handful of aged men, all of whom said they would do anything for the
+_Americanos_ if they were spared their lives. These frightened people
+were soon put at ease, and then an inspection of the captured place
+was instituted.
+
+In various places, such as the vaults of convents and government
+buildings, huge quantities of _pilai_, that is, unhulled rice, were
+found. Some of the rice was confiscated for army use, and a large
+quantity was distributed to the natives who gradually drifted in,
+saying they wanted to be friendly, and that they were starving.
+
+"It may be that the rice we give away may go to the rebels," said the
+general in command. "But we can't let these poor wretches starve, war
+or no war;" and so the bags were given out until very little
+remained.
+
+It was not General Lawton's intention to quarter at Angat for any
+length of time, and, having entered the town in the morning, he left
+it in the afternoon, to begin an advance up the river the next day,
+striking San Rafael on the right bank and Muronco on the left bank.
+
+"Somebody has set Angat on fire!" exclaimed Ben, as the regiment
+marched away. A thick column of smoke had suddenly risen from the
+upper end of the town.
+
+"I don't believe it was our men," answered Major Morris, who walked
+beside the young captain. "They had strict orders not to loot or
+burn."
+
+The flames speedily increased, as one nipa hut after another caught,
+and the warehouses added to the blaze. The Americans always thought
+the rebels started this conflagration, while the insurgents laid the
+crime at our door. However it was, Angat burned fiercely, and by
+nightfall little remained of its many picturesque buildings.
+
+The weather was beginning to tell upon the troops, and out of Ben's
+regiment fully forty men were on the sick list, with either colds or
+tropical fever, and these had to be sent back to a sick camp. The
+balance of the command, it was decided, should join the troops that
+were to attack San Rafael.
+
+As before, the sharpshooters were in front, while the infantry were
+escorted by Scott's battery, who, as soon as the enemy's firing line
+was located, began to pour in a hot fire of shrapnel, much to the
+latter's discomfiture. Then Ben's regiment went into action once more,
+the young captain's company on the edge of some heavy brush.
+
+The sharp clip, clip of Mauser bullets made unpleasant music as the
+soldier boys rushed through the thickets, to surprise not a few
+Filipinos who were in hiding, and who imagined that the Americans
+would pass them by unnoticed. Once Ben came upon a man lying on his
+face in a mass of tall grass, every part of his body concealed but his
+back.
+
+"Can he be dead?" thought the young captain, when of a sudden the
+native leaped up like lightning and darted behind the nearest bushes
+before anybody could stop him. Half a dozen soldiers fired on him, and
+he fired in return, but none of the shots took effect; and Ben could
+not but think that the poor creature had earned his escape. "For ten
+chances to one he doesn't know what he is fighting about," he said to
+Gilmore.
+
+"Right you are," answered the lieutenant. "I believe if we could
+corral the whole crowd and explain the true situation to them, they
+would throw down their arms without hesitation. It is only the leaders
+who are keeping this rebellion alive."
+
+Over near the battery just mentioned stood General Lawton, tall and
+erect, directing every movement, without a single thought of personal
+danger. Many a shot was directed at him, but he seemed to bear a
+charmed life.
+
+"San Rafael will soon be ours," said one of the officers of the staff.
+"See, the enemy are retreating!" he cried enthusiastically.
+
+At that moment an orderly dashed up, carrying an order from General
+Otis. The order read that the column must rest at Angat until supplies
+could be forwarded from Malolos. A shadow fell over the commando's
+face. Another victory was at hand--but orders were orders, and must be
+obeyed. Slowly the retreat was sounded, and the insurgents were left
+in possession of the field. They thought the Americans were being
+forced back on account of a heavy loss, and went almost wild with
+delight, proclaiming the encounter a great victory for the Filipino
+cause.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE CROSSING OF THE RIO GRANDE RIVER
+
+
+"For gracious' sake, what did we want to retreat for?" demanded Ben,
+as soon as the command halted and Major Morris had come within
+speaking distance. The young captain had been at the very front of the
+firing line, and had seen that complete victory was only the work of a
+quarter of an hour or less.
+
+"Orders from general headquarters," replied the major, in a low tone.
+"I fancy the staff is pretty angry, too," he added.
+
+"We could have whipped them with ease."
+
+"So we could, captain, but--" And Major Morris finished with a shrug
+of his shoulders which meant a good deal.
+
+"I don't believe General Otis would have given such an order had he
+been here to see what was going on," continued Ben, earnestly.
+
+"Well, we're ordered back to Angat, and that is all there is to it.
+The army must have supplies, you know."
+
+"Hang the supplies!" muttered Gilmore, but under his breath. "We can
+get all the supplies we want as we go along." And Ben was rather
+inclined to agree with him.
+
+There was no help, however, for the turn in the situation; and with
+crestfallen faces the soldiers moved still further back and went into
+temporary camp. Only a few had suffered, and the wounded ones were
+promptly cared for by the hospital corps.
+
+"And how do you feel?" asked Gilbert, as he came up to see Ben. "Does
+the wound hurt still?"
+
+"It itches, that's all," answered Ben. "But this retreat--"
+
+"Makes one feel sore all over, doesn't it?" finished the young
+Southerner. "I must say I don't understand it at all. If we are going
+to round up any of these rebels, we can't do it by falling back and
+waiting for supplies."
+
+Impatient as they were, however, the troops had to wait for two days
+before another movement was made. During this time supplies were
+hurried forward in large quantities, that there might be no more
+delays in the future.
+
+In the meantime the troops under General MacArthur were by no means
+idle. They consisted of two brigades, that of General Hale on the
+right wing, and that of General Wheaton on the left wing. Of these
+troops the first advance was by some men of the Fourth Cavalry, who
+went forward to reconnoitre the enemy's position near Quingua. The
+start was made during the early morning, and before long the
+insurgents opened a heavy fire which the Americans returned with
+difficulty, as the rebels were well concealed by the tall grass and
+their intrenchments. To aid the cavalry a number of other troops were
+hurried forward, also several field-pieces; and in the end the
+Filipinos were forced from their position, with a heavy loss. In this
+battle the Americans lost six killed and forty wounded. Among the
+killed was Colonel Stotsenburg, commanding the First Nebraska
+Volunteers, who, after most gallantly leading his men, was shot down
+in the final rush upon the enemy's earthworks.
+
+From Quingua the whole of General Hale's brigade moved down the
+Quingua River to Pulilan. Here no resistance was encountered, and
+after a brief rest the brigade pushed on toward Logundi. That town
+was not yet reached when the advance guard reported a breastwork
+across the main road, running to the river on the west and into the
+jungle on the east.
+
+"Never mind, we'll go ahead anyhow!" shouted the soldiers of the
+Nebraska regiment; and go ahead they did, with the South Dakota and
+Iowa troops beside them, and several guns of the Sixth Artillery
+protecting their advance. The fight at the earthworks was a fierce
+one, some of the Filipinos refusing to surrender even when they knew
+they were beaten; and as a consequence many of them were slain whose
+lives might otherwise have been spared to them.
+
+A short distance to the northwest of Logundi, the Quingua and the
+Bagbag rivers join in flowing into the Calumpit. The railroad crosses
+the Bagbag but a short distance away, and at this point General Hale's
+command reunited with that of General Wheaton, which had come up along
+the tracks from Malolos without difficulty. General Wheaton had with
+him the troops from Montana and Kansas, some Utah artillery, and one
+or two other commands, along with two armored cars, fitted out with
+Gatling and Hotchkiss guns and six-pounders.
+
+It was soon discovered that the rebels had built strong breastworks in
+a semicircle along the north bank of the Bagbag and the western bank
+of the Calumpit Rivers, and had injured the railroad track for a
+distance of several hundred yards, and also the bridge spanning the
+river. As the approach to both rivers was largely an open one, how to
+dislodge the Filipinos became a serious problem.
+
+"Forward with the armored cars!" was the cry, and they were rushed
+ahead as far as the torn-up condition of the railroad tracks admitted.
+A cannonading lasting for half an hour followed, in which one of the
+batteries on the highway also took part. The aim of the gunners was
+good, and soon the insurgents were seen to be pouring from the
+trenches, which were getting too hot to hold them. Yet a fair number
+held their ground, and when the troops on foot advanced they opened a
+blistering fire which laid not a few Americans low. But the victory
+was ours, and soon the followers of Old Glory were wading or swimming
+the river, while the engineering corps set to work to repair the
+damage done to railroad and bridge, so that the armored and baggage
+cars might pass through.
+
+The cry was now, "On to Calumpit!" which town lies on the Calumpit
+River, and is divided into two parts by another stream, called the Rio
+Grande. It was found that the insurgents had practically deserted the
+lower half of the town, but had intrenchments on the upper bank of the
+Rio Grande which were even more formidable than those taken on the
+Bagbag. Here the rebels had also a Maxim and other guns, and it seemed
+as if for once the advance of the Americans was thoroughly blocked.
+Numerous good positions along the south bank of the river were held by
+our troops, but it looked as if they could not get over the stream
+without a tremendous loss of life.
+
+It is said that the opportunity makes the man, and in this instance
+the saying proved a true one. With the soldiers under General Wheaton
+were the Twentieth Kansas Volunteers, who had already made a record
+for themselves at Malolos and elsewhere, as related in a previous
+volume of this series. They were commanded by Colonel Frederick
+Funston, a man comparatively young in years and small in stature, but
+one who was daring to the last degree, and who had seen much of
+fighting and hardships during his adventurous existence. In Cuba,
+Funston had fought most valiantly under Garcia for Cuban liberty long
+before any interference by the United States.
+
+To Colonel, afterward Brigadier General, Funston belongs the honor of
+the passage of the Rio Grande, for it was he who planned what was
+done, and he and a score of his fighting Kansans who carried it out.
+The daring of the scheme is one which will live long in American
+history.
+
+As before mentioned, the bridge was partly broken, but enough
+remained for the passage of soldiers who could climb from one iron
+cross-section to another. At first it was hoped that a body might go
+over the bridge in the dark, raise a great commotion, and cause
+the Filipinos a panic. This scheme was tried, but it failed; for the
+enemy was on strict guard, and would have shot down the men as
+rapidly as they appeared on the bridge.
+
+Colonel Funston then proposed to go down the river bank for a
+considerable distance, build rafts, and, by means of a stout rope,
+ferry some of the best of his men across the stream in the dark. The
+landing of the men was to be covered by the heaviest possible fire
+from the American side, and, as soon as they were safe ashore, the
+Kansas soldiers were to secure some position where they might enfilade
+the enemy's trenches, that is, fire through them from one end, so
+that the Filipinos might no longer find them safe. In the meantime
+more troops were to come over with all possible speed.
+
+On the way down the stream the Kansas soldiers demolished several
+huts, selecting the best of the timber with which to build their
+rafts. The moon was under a cloud, and it looked as if they might get
+across the river without serious trouble.
+
+But as the crowd were constructing their rafts and getting their ferry
+rope ready for use, the moon came out brightly; and very soon the
+insurgents became suspicious and fired on the Americans, who were
+forced to retreat to the nearest shelter. The firing kept up the
+greater part of two hours, and at last the plan to cross over that
+night was abandoned.
+
+But the Kansas colonel and his gallant men had determined to be the
+first into the enemy's camp, and once again they went to the spot
+previously selected, but this time in the broad daylight, when they
+might clearly see the shore opposite. No insurgents were in sight;
+and, after having made three rafts all right and tight, the rope was
+brought forth, and two men, named White and Trembly, were asked to
+carry it across the stream. The soldiers plunged into the water
+without delay, being watched by hundreds of their comrades left
+behind. The men were without their uniforms or weapons of any kind.
+
+Slowly the pair swam the turbulent waters of the stream, and hardly
+had they gotten fifty feet from shore when the rebels opened fire upon
+them, at first a few scattering shots and then a perfect volley. That
+the swimmers escaped is little short of a miracle. But they remained
+untouched, and, gaining the opposite bank, they ran forward and tied
+the rope's end to a tree-stump. In the meantime two other soldiers
+started over the Rio Grande in a dugout, but this upset and let the
+men into the water, and they had to swim as had the others. But they
+landed with their guns intact, and at once opened fire at the nearest
+natives that showed themselves.
+
+All this had happened with great rapidity, and now the first raft was
+coming across the river, loaded with Kansas soldiers officered by
+Colonel Funston himself. The raft became the target for the hottest
+kind of fire, and as the ferrying had to be done by the soldiers
+pulling along the rope stretched from shore to shore, the passage was
+as slow as it was dangerous. But the soldiers on the craft went over
+in safety, and soon more followed, until over fifty were on the beach
+fronting the enemy's intrenchments. Then, with a wild yelling, to give
+the rebels the impression that a large body had come over, they pushed
+forward to enfilade the enemy's trenches as first proposed.
+
+But now another difficulty arose. There was a small stream flowing
+into the Rio Grande near this spot, and this had to be crossed before
+the fire of the Americans could be made effective. How to get across
+was a problem, as the insurgents had a machine gun trained on the
+spot. This worked for a while and then stopped; and in the lull
+Colonel Funston secured a rowboat and went over with some of his men,
+and the others soon followed.
+
+The Filipinos were now thoroughly frightened, for the Americans were
+making a great outcry down by the railroad bridge, and they imagined
+that they were to be attacked from several points at once. Some
+started to run, and as soon as Colonel Funston's men began to rain
+their bullets into the long trenches, more followed, until the enemy
+was in a panic. Then the Americans began to cross the bridge and
+stream in great numbers, and the Filipinos, although reënforced by a
+body of Macabebes just at this time, could not make an effective
+stand. Calumpit was left behind, and a running fight ensued which
+ended at Apalit, when a violent tropical thunderstorm put an end to
+the day's operations. It was thought that the rebels' headquarters
+would be found at Apalit; but this had, at the last moment, been
+removed to San Isidro, toward which General Lawton was now advancing.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+SOMETHING ABOUT A POISONED WELL
+
+
+After the rest at Angat, the taking of San Rafael by General Lawton's
+troops was an easy matter, and on May 1--the anniversary of Admiral
+Dewey's great victory in Manila Bay--the soldiers set out for the town
+of Baliuag, five miles to the northward.
+
+In spite of the recent rain, the road was hard and even dusty in
+spots. The heat was still as great as ever, and Ben was glad to take
+the benefit of any shade that afforded itself as he marched along at
+the head of his command. The date made him think of the battle just
+mentioned, and this brought him around to Larry once more, and he
+began to wonder if his brother would ever turn up again.
+
+"I suppose I'll have to write to Walter and to Uncle Job about this,"
+he muttered dismally. "But I hate to do it, especially if Larry does
+turn up, for I know it will worry both of them greatly."
+
+The road was thick with palms and plantains and trailing plants, the
+latter of gorgeous colorings. Nipa huts and bamboo cottages were
+numerous, but the inmates kept themselves well hidden as the little
+army passed by. In the distance were paddy-fields and cane-brakes, and
+along the road were numerous mud-holes, some of which had to be
+bridged over before the artillery could pass in safety. More than once
+horses and cannon got stuck, and many a shoulder had to be put to the
+pieces to budge them.
+
+"If there was no war, this would be a delightful spot in which to
+spend a vacation," remarked Gilbert, who had come up for a little
+talk, as was his habit when they were pushing ahead in irregular
+formation. "I reckon the natives take solid comfort in their homes."
+
+"I suppose it puts you in mind of the South at home," returned Ben,
+with a smile, "It is nice, certainly. But I fancy this continual heat
+would make one mighty lazy in time."
+
+"Well, the natives are lazy, you can easily see that," laughed the
+young Southerner. "I wish I could get a good drink of water," he
+added, a minute later.
+
+They soon came to a pretty dwelling, set in a perfect wilderness of
+flowers and shrubs. Toward the side they made out a well, and ran
+forward to fill their canteens.
+
+The pair were at the well when a shrill cry from one of the side rooms
+of the house attracted their attention. Looking up, they saw a native
+girl waving her hand frantically at them. The girl was nicely dressed
+and evidently belonged to the better classes.
+
+"We only want a drink!" shouted Ben, thinking that the maiden might
+imagine they had come into the garden to steal.
+
+But the girl shouted more loudly than ever, and waved them away from
+the well. "Bad! bad!" she cried.
+
+"Oh, no, we are not so bad as you think," Gilbert shouted back; and
+was about to take a drink from a cocoanut-shell dipper which hung
+handy, when the girl came out of the cottage on a run and dashed the
+dipper to the ground. At the same time an evil-looking Filipino
+appeared at the doorway, shook his fist at the girl, and then suddenly
+ran for the barns behind the dwelling and disappeared.
+
+"I want a drink and I'm going to have it," began Gilbert, sternly, for
+he did not like the manner in which the water had been spilt over his
+clothing. "If you--"
+
+"The well is poisoned; don't drink, it will kill you!" gasped the
+girl, in Spanish.
+
+[Illustration: "The well is poisoned! don't drink! it will kill
+you!"--_Page 115._]
+
+As old readers know, Gilbert understood a little of the language,
+having picked it up while on a trip to Cuba, and also while serving as
+a Rough Rider in that island. He started back and caught the maiden by
+the arm.
+
+"Poisoned! you are certain?" he cried.
+
+"Yes, señor; my uncle put the poison in only yesterday. He lost much
+at Angat, and he is very angry at the _Americanos_ in consequence. He
+knew the soldiers were coming this way, and he wanted to poison as
+many as he could. He put a water-barrel down on the road full of the
+poisoned water, too."
+
+"Who is your uncle, the man who just ran off?"
+
+"Yes, señor. But, oh, do not go after him, I pray you!" cried the
+girl, in high alarm. "I would not have spoken, but I could not see you
+poisoned before my very eyes; no, not that!"
+
+As quickly as he could, Gilbert translated her words to Ben, who
+listened in amazement.
+
+"The villain!" ejaculated the young captain. "I've heard of this sort
+of thing being done before. I wonder where that barrel is that she
+spoke about? We must find it and empty it of its contents."
+
+Gilbert put the question to the girl, who announced that the barrel
+was on another road back of the plantation. Whether any of the
+soldiers had reached it or not was a question.
+
+As quickly as he could Ben reported the situation to his superior, and
+received orders to divide his company, leaving a part to guard the
+poisoned well so that no Americans might drink from it, while the rest
+should go and hunt up the water-barrel. Gilbert was detailed to
+accompany Ben, and the girl was given to understand that she must take
+the soldiers to where the barrel had been set up.
+
+At first the maiden demurred; but there was no help for it, and the
+kind smiles which Gilbert and Ben gave her were an assurance that no
+harm was about to befall her. Yet she was afraid that when the
+reckoning came her uncle would deal harshly with her, and trembled
+violently as she moved through the rice-fields with the two young
+officers beside her.
+
+The little command had nearly reached the back road when the report of
+a gun rang out, coming from the direction of a wood behind the
+rice-fields. The bullet sped past Ben's shoulder, to bury itself in
+the fleshy part of one of his private's arms.
+
+"'Tis my uncle!" cried the girl. "Oh, he will kill us all, I am sure
+of it!" And she became so agitated that she sank down and could not go
+another step.
+
+Without hesitation, Ben ordered his men forward on the run, and away
+went the detachment for the spot from whence the unexpected shot had
+come. As the soldiers neared the wood they beheld a Filipino in the
+act of running across a small opening.
+
+"That's him, the rascal!" roared Dan Casey, and taking a hasty aim he
+fired, and the rebel was seen to plunge forward on his face. When the
+party came up they found that the man had been hit in the hip, and
+that the wound, while not necessarily dangerous, was serious, and
+would put the fellow out of the contest for several months.
+
+"It serves him right," said Ben. "Poisoning drinking water is not fair
+fighting."
+
+The girl soon came up, crying bitterly. She wished to remain by her
+uncle, but Ben made her understand that she must point out the
+water-barrel first, and after that he would have two soldiers remove
+the wounded man to the cottage.
+
+Ten minutes later the rear road was gained, and here the water-barrel
+was found, set up on end, with the top knocked out. It was
+three-quarters full of water, and a dozen or more soldiers were
+drinking and filling their canteens.
+
+"Stop drinking!" ordered Ben, when still at a distance. "That water
+has been doctored and will make you sick." He refrained from saying
+the water was poisoned for fear of creating a panic.
+
+The water was at once poured out on the ground and the barrel smashed
+up. Then a surgeon was found, to whom Ben related the facts of the
+case. A canteen of the water was examined, and the surgeon decided to
+give the man who had drunk the stuff an emetic. A few of the soldiers
+were taken with cramps inside of an hour afterward, and two of them
+were seriously sick for a week; but no lives were lost. But if the
+soldiers could have got at the Filipino who had poisoned the water,
+they would have shot him on the spot.
+
+As soon as the danger was over, Ben returned to the wood, and had two
+men carry the wounded man back to the cottage, where he was left in
+charge of his wife and his niece. Through Gilbert it was learned that
+the wife had also remonstrated against using the poison, so it was
+fair to suppose that the aunt would protect her niece to a certain
+degree. "But she'll have a hard time of it for doing us a service,
+I'm afraid," said the young Southerner, as he and Ben resumed the
+march.
+
+The scouts, under Chief Young, were in advance, and now a steady
+firing from the front told that another battle was at hand. Soon
+General Lawton came dashing through the crowd on the road, followed by
+his staff.
+
+"Forward, boys!" was the cry, and then Ben's command left the road and
+took to the rice-fields on the outskirts of Baliuag. The line was a
+long one, with the Oregon and Minnesota soldiers forming the
+skirmishing end, and Scott's battery in a paddy-field on the extreme
+right. So far the insurgents had kept well hidden; but as the
+Americans drew closer to the town they could be seen running in half a
+dozen directions, as if undecided whether to fight or to flee.
+
+The townspeople themselves were in a panic, and down the streets ran
+Filipinos and Chinese, some with their household effects piled high on
+their backs. They had heard of the coming of the _Americanos_, but had
+hoped almost against hope that their beloved town would be passed by
+unmolested.
+
+Ben's regiment was moving along rapidly when they came to a ditch
+which seemed to divide the rice-field in half. A short pause followed,
+when along came the cry of "Down!" and every man dropped, and none too
+soon, for the insurgents had opened up unexpectedly from a cane-brake
+behind the rice-field.
+
+"We must take that cane-brake," came the order from the colonel, and
+the word was passed along quickly, and away went the companies with a
+ringing cheer, firing as they ran, and reloading with all possible
+speed.
+
+Ben was now truly in his element, and, waving his sword, he urged
+Company D well to the front, so that the cane was soon reached. But
+the rebels were not game for a hand-to-hand encounter and fled once
+more, through the cane and over a field of heavy grass leading to the
+very outskirts of the town beyond.
+
+"They are running away!" was the cry. "On we go, boys, and the town
+will be ours in less than half an hour."
+
+But now a halt was ordered, on the edge of the cane-brake. From the
+outskirts of the town appeared a Filipino waving a white rag over his
+head.
+
+"Flag of truce!" cried the American general. "Cease firing!" And the
+order was instantly obeyed. "Major Morris, you can select a detail of
+three men and find out what they want."
+
+"I will, general," answered the major of the first battalion, and
+saluted. He had soon chosen his men, one of whom was Gilbert
+Pennington, and, waving a white flag before them, the party of four
+advanced into the open field.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+IN WHICH A FLAG OF TRUCE IS FIRED UPON
+
+
+Major Morris well knew the wiliness of the Filipinos, yet he did not
+doubt but that they would pay due respect to a flag of truce which
+they had themselves invited. Accordingly he advanced boldly with his
+little party, until the four had covered fully one-half of the
+distance which separated the American troops from the point where the
+rebels had taken a stand.
+
+"He is thrustin' thim a whole lot!" groaned Dan Casey, who was the
+closest man in the ranks to Ben. "If he gits plugged--"
+
+"They won't dare to fire, Dan," said a companion. "If they did--"
+
+The speech was cut short by the pop of a Mauser rifle, followed by two
+more pops, and the private who carried the white flag was seen to
+fling the banner down and fall headlong. In the meantime, the
+Filipinos who had appeared with the white rag were running back to
+their own ranks with all possible speed.
+
+"They have fired on the flag of truce!" The cry arose from a hundred
+throats, and then a scattering volley rang out. At the same time the
+Filipinos opened up in a body, and Major Morris, Gilbert, and the
+third man were seen to pitch into the tall grass in such a manner that
+they were almost hidden from view.
+
+"Gilbert is shot! And Major Morris too!" Such was the painful thought
+which ran through Ben's brain. He looked at the colonel pleadingly.
+
+"Advance at once, Captain Russell, with the first battalion, to the
+rescue of the flag of truce," ordered the colonel, understanding him
+fully. "After this, give the enemy no quarter."
+
+"Forward, men, to the rescue!" shouted the young captain, almost
+before his superior had finished. "Deploy to the left and fire at
+will. And make every shot tell!" he added bitterly.
+
+"Forward it is!" shouted Dan Casey. "Down wid the haythins that don't
+know the manin' av honor!" And he led in the rush over the long
+grass.
+
+The whole line was soon advancing, but Ben's company was in front, and
+kept there until within a hundred feet of where the four men had gone
+down. Then, to his amazement, the young captain saw Major Morris leap
+up, followed by Gilbert and the third soldier, and run with all speed
+toward the American line.
+
+"Not shot!" cried Ben, joyfully. "Heaven be thanked for that!" And he
+almost felt like embracing his two friends. Only the flag-bearer had
+been struck, and he not seriously. The others had gone down in the
+long grass to destroy the enemy's aim. The wounded flag-carrier was
+taken to the rear, and then the whole line pushed on with a yell which
+was as savage as it was loud and long. The incident, short as it was,
+was not forgotten, and when one end of the American line closed in on
+the retreating insurgents the latter fought to the last, knowing only
+too well that little quarter would be given to them because of their
+perfidy.
+
+The long American line had swung toward Baliuag in a semicircle, and
+now, when the insurgents tried to flee by way of the north, they found
+themselves confronted front and rear. This put them in more of a
+panic than ever; and had General Lawton had a thousand additional
+troops, it is more than likely he could have surrounded the rebels
+completely and compelled every one in that territory to throw down his
+arms.
+
+But he had not the extra men, nor could he get them. Moreover, he had
+hardly a decent map of the territory, while the enemy knew every
+field, every road, and every stream. They could not make a stand at
+Baliuag, nor could they run in the direction of San Rafael, so their
+only course was to take to the rice-fields, the cane-brakes, and the
+jungle, and this they did in short order.
+
+By the time the outskirts of the town was gained Ben's command was
+almost exhausted; yet the colonel of the regiment felt that now was no
+time to rest, and company after company was sent out in the hope that
+some of the scattering bands of insurgents might be rounded up.
+
+"Major Morris, you will take your four companies up yonder road," said
+the colonel, after receiving orders from General Lawton's orderly, and
+the head of the regiment pointed out the road in question. Soon the
+battalion was off on the double-quick, the major more than eager to
+wipe out the treachery which had been shown to him and his companions
+but an hour or two before.
+
+The road which the battalion followed was a winding one, lined with
+cottages of the better sort, showing that this was a fashionable
+outskirt of the town. Only a few people showed themselves, and nothing
+was seen or heard of the insurgents until a quarter of a mile had been
+covered, and the best of the habitations had been left behind. Then
+came an unexpected fire from a cane-brake, and out dashed fully two
+hundred savage-looking Tagals armed with guns and bolos.
+
+"Halt! Fire!" came the commands, and the Americans obeyed as quickly
+as possible. Several of our men had been hit, one seriously, and now
+half a dozen Filipinos went down. For several minutes the fighting was
+at close quarters, and it looked as if the battalion had run into an
+ambush and were about to be slaughtered.
+
+"To the shelter of the trees!" shouted Ben, and was about to guide his
+men when a fierce-looking rebel officer leaped before him with drawn
+sword. His own blade met that of the enemy, and both flashed fire. But
+the Tagal was a fine swordsman and kept at his work, feeling certain
+that he could run the _Americano_ through and through. Clack! clack!
+went the blades, up and down, side to side, and straight forward.
+
+"Take care there!" came from Major Morris, and just then the Tagal's
+sword pricked Ben's arm. The young captain leaped back a step, then
+came forward, and as quick as lightning his sword found the Tagal's
+ribs. At the same time Dan Casey fired at the enemy, and the officer
+went down flat on his back, shot through the breast.
+
+"I had to do it," cried the Irish volunteer. "I thought he was afther
+stickin' ye like a pig!"
+
+"It was a close shave," murmured Ben, as he passed on. "He handled his
+sword like an expert. I shan't forget you for that, Casey."
+
+"Sure, an' that's all right, captain," answered the soldier, quickly.
+"Is your arm hurted much?"
+
+"I guess not. Come, we've got them on the run again." And away the
+pair went, into the cane-brake, through which the rebels were crashing
+like so many wild cattle.
+
+The day had been full of excitement, but much more was to follow. The
+cane-brakes were heavy, and soon Ben and Casey found themselves
+separated from the main body of the battalion and out of sight of
+their own company. Then several Filipinos confronted them and called
+upon them to surrender.
+
+"We ain't surrenderin' just yit, we ain't!" howled the Irish soldier,
+and let drive at the nearest rebel, while Ben discharged his pistol.
+Two of the enemy were wounded, and in an instant the others took to
+their heels, evidently convinced that such fighters were "too many"
+for them.
+
+The encounter, however, had taken time, and now Ben called upon his
+companion to stop running. "We want to know where we are running to
+first," he said. "Listen."
+
+They listened and made out a distant firing to both the right and the
+left. "I'm afther thinkin' our b'ys is to the right," said Dan Casey.
+
+"I believe you are right, Casey; although both of us may be mistaken,"
+rejoined the young captain of Company D. "We will try that direction,
+anyway."
+
+They continued on their way through the cane-brake until they reached
+a small stream. Here the ground was soft and full of treacherous
+bog-holes, and both looked at each other in dismay.
+
+"Sure, an' this is more than we bargained fer, eh, captain?" remarked
+Casey, as he pulled himself out of a hole into which he had gone
+almost to his knees. "If we don't look out we'll git stuck so tight
+there'll be no budgin' av us."
+
+"The ground to the right seems to be firmer," replied Ben. "Come, we
+will move in that direction."
+
+But to get out of the soft spot was not easy, and soon they found
+themselves between the tall cane and up to their knees in a muck that
+seemed to stick worse than glue.
+
+"Sure, an' this is fightin' wid a vengeance," said the Irish
+volunteer, smiling grimly. "It's sthuck we are like flies on a fly
+paper, eh, Captain Russell?"
+
+"We've got to get out somehow, Casey," answered Ben, half desperately.
+"Our command is marching farther and farther away, and we'll have all
+we can do to get up to them."
+
+"Sure thin, an' Major Morris betther send a detail back wid a long
+rope to pull us out. We couldn't fly from the inimy now if we thried,
+could we?"
+
+"This is no joke, Casey."
+
+"Joke, bedad? No, captain, I'm afther thinkin' it's a mighty sarious
+difficulty. But there's no use av cryin', no matther how bad it is,"
+finished the Irish soldier, philosophically.
+
+A moment of reflection convinced Ben that the best thing he could do
+was to go back part of the distance they had come, and make an
+endeavor to cross the little stream at another point.
+
+They retreated with difficulty, first one sinking into some
+treacherous hole and then the other. Once Casey went flat on his back,
+and gave a loud yell of dismay when he found himself covered with a
+mud that was more like a paste than anything else.
+
+"Sure, an' I'll not go in such a cane-field again, bedad," he
+muttered, as he started to pick up the gun he had dropped. As he did
+so a cracking of cane-stalks near them caused both to straighten up in
+alarm.
+
+"Who comes?" cried Ben, and drew the pistol he had shoved into his
+belt.
+
+There was no answer and he repeated the demand. "Are you Americans?"
+he added.
+
+Still there was no reply. But the cracking of the stalks continued,
+and the sounds seemed to move around the pair in something of a
+circle. Then came a soft command in the Tagalog dialect. At once Dan
+Casey clutched Ben by the arm.
+
+"They be afther surroundin' us, captain," he whispered. "Be the noises
+there must be tin or a dozen av thim. Phwat shall we do, fight or run
+fer it?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+SURROUNDED BY THE ENEMY
+
+
+For the moment after Dan Casey spoke Ben was silent, not knowing
+himself what was best to do. That the Filipinos were surrounding them
+there could be no doubt, since those approaching would have answered
+the young captain of Company D had they been Americans.
+
+The position of the pair was dangerous in the extreme, for the tall
+cane-stalks surrounded them upon all sides, giving shelter to the
+enemy, while the Tagals could see the volunteers with ease.
+
+"Keep quiet, Casey," whispered Ben, as the soldier started to speak
+again. "They may not know how many there are of us here and sneak off,
+fearing an ambush."
+
+The Irish volunteer nodded to show that he understood. He was holding
+his gun before him, ready to shoot whenever it appeared necessary.
+
+Presently there was another whispered command, coming from directly in
+front of our friends. A slight movement in the cane-brake followed,
+and then all became silent once more.
+
+"Come!" whispered Ben. "Don't fire until you see me do so."
+
+Thus speaking, the young captain moved slowly and cautiously from the
+spot they had occupied for five minutes or more. He picked his steps,
+and they fell as silently as those of a cat after a bird. Casey was at
+his heels, almost holding his breath, and his small eyes glistening
+with expectancy. Both knew that they were carrying their lives in
+their hands.
+
+Two rods had been covered, and still nothing was seen of the
+Filipinos. Was it possible that they had withdrawn? But no, there was
+another cracking of cane-stalks and another command in the Tagalog
+language, coming now from their left. Then of a sudden a Mauser rang
+out, and a bullet whistled back of Ben's head and across Casey's
+face.
+
+The report had not yet died out when Ben fired, straight for the flash
+of fire of which he had caught a momentary glimpse. That his shot
+reached its mark was proven by the wild yell of pain which followed.
+
+"The jig is up!" cried Dan Casey. "We must run fer it, captain!" And
+as a Tagal came into view before them he fired point-blank at the
+fellow, hitting him in the breast and killing him on the spot.
+
+As luck would have it, the Filipino whom Casey had killed was a petty
+officer and the leader of the detachment, and his sudden taking-off
+disconcerted the insurgents for a minute, who yelled one to another
+that their leader was shot. Taking advantage of the confusion, our
+friends rushed headlong through the cane-brake, firing several times
+as they ran. A dozen shots answered them, but none of these took
+effect.
+
+"I think the road is yonder," said Ben, pointing with his pistol as
+they progressed. "Hark!"
+
+From a distance came a scattering volley, proving that the fighting
+was not yet over. It came from the direction in which they were
+running. But now those left behind were after them, shooting and
+shouting with vigor, for they were ten to two, and were determined
+that the wicked _Americanos_ should not escape their clutches.
+
+At last the cane-brake was left behind. Beyond was a small part of a
+rice-field, and close by a cottage which appeared deserted.
+
+"Sure, captain, an' we'll be shot down like dogs if we show ourselves
+in th' open," panted Casey, who was almost out of breath.
+
+"Get behind the house," answered Ben. "It is our one chance," and he
+started in advance. Again the Filipinos fired on them, and this time a
+bullet touched the young captain's side, cutting a straight hole
+through his clothing.
+
+They were yet a hundred feet from the cottage when two American
+soldiers came rushing forth, guns in hand. The strangers took in the
+situation at a glance, and let drive with such good aim that two of
+the enemy fell back wounded. The others paused, not knowing how many
+Americans might be concealed in the building, and in another minute
+Ben and Casey were for the time being safe.
+
+"By gum, ef it ain't Captain Russell!" cried one of the soldiers, as
+he faced Ben. "I'm right glad to be yere to help ye, cap'n," and he
+smiled broadly.
+
+"Ralph Sorrel!" returned Ben, as he recognized the tall Tennesseean
+who had once accompanied him on a search for Gilbert when the young
+Southerner was missing. "What are you doing here?"
+
+"Jeming an' me hev got a wounded man with us--Sergeant Kaser o' our
+company. We war takin' him back o' the lines, when he got so bad we
+brung him in yere to rest a spell. But you--"
+
+"Thim rebels is comin' agin!" announced Dan Casey. "Six, eight, nine
+av thim, wid wan limpin'. How many av us are there here?" he asked, as
+he looked around.
+
+"Four," answered Ben. "Load up, boys, and when you shoot--"
+
+"We'll make every shot tell," answered Jeming, a hardy-looking
+soldier, almost as tall as his companion.
+
+"I don't believe they will come very close," continued Ben. "They know
+that we have the advantage of them, even if we are but four to nine."
+
+The young captain was right. The Filipinos had showed themselves only
+for a few seconds. Now, as Sorrel raised his gun, they lost no time in
+darting behind cover.
+
+The cottage consisted of four rooms, all on the ground floor, and a
+low loft upstairs. It was well built and fairly furnished in native
+fashion. On the single bed it contained lay the wounded soldier,
+Sergeant Kaser, whom Ben had met several times. He was hit in the
+neck, and looked as if he could last but a few hours at the most.
+
+"Sorry we can't git ye back to camp, sergeant," said Sorrel, as he did
+what he could to ease the wounded one's pain. "The house is surrounded
+by the enemy. I reckon we kin keep 'em out, but I reckon likewise thet
+they kin keep us in--at least fer a while."
+
+"It--don't--matter," gasped Sergeant Kaser. "I am not--not--long for
+this world. What a terrible thing war is! I never thought I was going
+to be shot down like this!" And he gave another gasp. His eyes were
+staring from his head, for he was suffering severe pain.
+
+Ben looked around the cottage for something which might be given to
+the sufferer to ease him. But the dwelling had been stripped of all
+small things, and nothing in the way of food, drink, or medicine
+remained. Sorrel had already bound a handkerchief soaked in cold water
+around the wounded neck, so nothing more could be done, excepting to
+raise the sufferer up to a sitting position, at his request. "I don't
+know as thet is best fer him," whispered the tall Tennesseean to Ben.
+"But he ain't long fer this world, as he says, an' he might as well
+hev his wish as not."
+
+In the meantime Casey and Jeming were on guard, one watching to the
+front and right, the other to the left and rear. The nearest building
+to the cottage was a hundred and fifty feet away, but bushes and small
+trees were numerous, and the Americans were afraid the rebels might
+try to sneak up behind these and surprise them.
+
+"Something is moving over there," announced Jeming, after watching
+several of the bushes for a short spell. "Can't make out, though, if
+it's man or beast."
+
+"Have you plenty of ammunition?" asked Ben, who, as an officer, felt
+in charge of the party.
+
+"Seventeen rounds, captain."
+
+"And how about you, Casey?"
+
+"Fifteen rounds," returned the Irish volunteer, after counting up the
+contents of his belt.
+
+"I have twelve rounds, captain," came from Sorrel. "But I reckon you
+know how I shoot, an' Jeming's jest as good, mebbe better."
+
+"I think the supply is sufficient," said Ben, "so don't run any
+chances. If you think that is an enemy give him a shot. But don't hit
+one of our fellows by mistake," he added, by way of caution.
+
+"It's a Tagal!" cried Jeming, while the young captain was yet beside
+him. The gun was levelled like a flash, a report followed, and the
+Filipino fell behind the bushes and was seen no more.
+
+"Thet will teach 'em to keep their distance," was Sorrel's comment.
+"Perhaps they'll clear out soon, bein' afeered some more o' our troops
+will come this way."
+
+But the natives were "game," as Ben expressed it; and instead of
+withdrawing, they began to come closer, using every bush, tree, and
+outbuilding to the best advantage. Some of their fellows had joined
+them, so that the attacking party now numbered fifteen, and each well
+armed. They had seen that Ben wore the uniform of a captain, and felt
+that the capture of such an officer would be much to their credit.
+
+Sergeant Kaser was now groaning so that he could be heard even outside
+of the building, and as the rebels had fired through the windows
+several times, they concluded that they had wounded one of the four
+men they knew to be inside. If this was so, but three _Americanos_
+were now left, and they felt that victory would soon be within their
+grasp.
+
+"Surrendor, or we kill eferyboddy!" cried one of the number, in
+English that could scarcely be understood. "We haf dreety mens
+outside."
+
+"We ain't surrenderin', not by a jugful!" answered Sorrel. "What in
+thunder does he mean by 'dreety mens'?" he added, to his companions.
+
+"I think he means thirty," answered Ben. "But I don't believe there
+are that many."
+
+"Yes, but there are more than there was," announced Casey, quickly.
+"I'm just afther seein' 'em pass yonder bushes." He had pointed his
+gun, but the Filipinos had been too quick for him.
+
+"Do you surrendor?" demanded the voice again. "We shall begin to shoot
+if you no gif up."
+
+"No surrender," answered Ben, firmly.
+
+Hardly had he spoken when something came rolling toward the cottage
+and stopped close to the porch. It was a rude ball made of sugar-cane
+husks and over a foot in diameter. The ball was ablaze and burning
+fiercely, as if covered with pitch.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+THE ESCAPE FROM THE BURNING HOUSE
+
+
+"Hullo, that's a new wrinkle!" exclaimed Ben. "They are going to try
+burning us out."
+
+"Sure, an' thim haythins is up to all sorts av dodges," cried Dan
+Casey. "It's meself as would like to git a squint at th' feller that
+threw that."
+
+"I've got him, I reckon," whispered Sorrel, taking a ready aim at a
+thin hedge to the left of the house. The report of his gun was
+followed by a shriek of pain, and a Filipino fell into view, the blood
+flowing freely from a wound in his neck. Soon his companions caught
+him by the legs and dragged him back into cover.
+
+After this brief exchange of "compliments," as the tall Tennesseean
+called it, there came a lull. Evidently the natives were disconcerted
+by the unexpected fall of the man who had thrown the fire-ball and
+knew not what to do.
+
+"Do you suppose they have quitted the vicinity?" questioned Jeming,
+after listening vainly for some sound from without. From a distance
+came a scattering fire, but around the native house was the silence of
+death, for the man who had been shot by Sorrel had fainted from loss
+of blood.
+
+"They are up to something, you can be certain of that," answered Ben.
+"The Filipino is at his worst when he is silent."
+
+"Right ye air, cap'n," put in Sorrel. "Yere she comes agin--an' a
+scorcher, too!"
+
+From over the bushes came a huge fire-ball, blazing brightly. It
+struck the thatch of the cottage close to the edge of the roof, and
+before it fell to the ground had set fire to the abode, which began to
+burn as though no shower had wet it for a month.
+
+"That settles it!" came from Jeming. "We've got to get out, or we'll
+be burnt up like rats in a corn-crib."
+
+"But the sergeant--" began Sorrel, when a low moan issued from the
+corner.
+
+"Never--mind--me, boys," came, with several gasps. "I'm--I'm going!
+Good--good--bye--to--to-- Tell mother--"
+
+He said no more, but fell back exhausted. All rushed to him, but ere
+anybody could raise his form again he was gone from this earth
+forever.
+
+Tears stood in the eyes of Ralph Sorrel, and Jeming was scarcely less
+affected, for both had known the sergeant intimately. "Another
+victim," murmured the tall Tennesseean. "How long is this yere blamed
+war goin' ter last, anyhow?"
+
+"Not much longer, I hope," answered Ben, in a low voice. "I, for one,
+have seen enough of bloodshed." Then the young captain straightened
+up, for fear he might break down. "But we must attend to our duty, and
+get away if we can. See, the flames are eating in at the window."
+
+"All right, cap'n, I'm ready," said Sorrel. "But we must carry this
+yere body outside fust. We can't let it be burnt up, nohow."
+
+He nodded to Jeming, who understood, and covering the form of the dead
+man with a blanket, they marched to the door with the stiffening form.
+The coast seemed clear, and they darted out and deposited their
+grewsome burden on the grass. They were just returning to the shelter
+of the doorway when two shots rang out, but neither was effective.
+
+By this time the cottage was burning so fiercely that to remain
+inside longer would have proved highly dangerous. Accordingly, Ben
+called a council of war.
+
+"I think we had best strike out for the grove of trees on the right,"
+he announced. "The distance is shorter than to the other shelters, and
+the grass is so high that perhaps we can get some benefit by stooping
+down as we run."
+
+"Right ye air, cap'n," answered Sorrel, and Casey and Jeming nodded.
+
+"Surrendor, you _Americanos_!" came in a shout from without.
+"Surrendor, you beasts!"
+
+"Let them burn up, they deserve it!" came in Spanish.
+
+"All ready?" asked Ben, and receiving a nod, he hurried to a side
+window. Below was a small bush, and in a moment he had dropped to the
+ground. As he started through the long grass, Casey and the others
+followed him.
+
+A wild yell speedily showed that this new movement had been
+discovered, and a dozen shots rang out. But the Filipinos were too
+excited to shoot straight, and the bullets merely clipped their way
+through the mango and other trees, or buried themselves in the side of
+the burning building.
+
+At first Ben thought to fire in return. But to find shelter was the
+prime consideration, and on he went, holding his pistol in readiness,
+but without pulling the trigger. Here and there a Filipino could be
+seen flitting from bush to tree, but these glimpses were short and far
+from satisfactory.
+
+"They are coming!" came from Dan Casey, just as the nearest of the
+trees was gained. "Back, ye rascals!" he shouted, and fired as quickly
+as he could. Casey was right; the Tagals were surrounding them, and
+now they had to fight back to back, in as hot a contest as the young
+captain had ever seen. They were clearly outnumbered, but retreat was
+impossible, for the Filipinos surrounded them upon every side.
+
+What happened during the next five minutes is almost impossible to
+describe, for every movement was executed with lightning-like
+rapidity, the Filipinos bound to kill or capture the Americans, and at
+the same time afraid that they would slip like eels through their
+fingers. After a score of shots taken at a distance, they closed in,
+and Ben found himself confronted by two fierce-looking men, one armed
+with a Mauser rifle and the other with a wicked-looking bolo. The
+Mauser was empty, and its owner evidently out of ammunition, for as
+he advanced he used the weapon as a club.
+
+Ben was hard pressed, for his pistol was now empty, and there was no
+chance to reload it. But his sword kept the two Tagals back, and had
+it not been for his gun, one of the enemy would have had his head
+split open from the blade. But now the rascal with the bolo tried to
+attack the young captain from one side, while he with the gun swung
+around to the other.
+
+[Illustration: "His sword kept the two Tagals back."--_Page 147._]
+
+Ben could expect no aid from his companions, for all were as hotly
+engaged as himself; indeed, Sorrel more so, for he was fighting three
+men, while Jeming and Dan Casey, side by side, and with their backs
+against a heavy thorn-bush, were fighting the balance of the
+detachment.
+
+The young captain felt that he could do little or nothing more, and
+expected each instant to have his assailants hurl themselves directly
+upon him, when a shout came from Sorrel which gave all of our friends
+hope.
+
+"Some soldiers air comin'!" sang out the Tennesseean. "This way, boys,
+this way, an' be quick about it!"
+
+"What's the matter?" came in a hoarse growl from the roadway, and in
+a few seconds a whole company of the North Dakota troops burst into
+view. Their captain, a short, fat man, but one who was an excellent
+fighter, took in the situation at a glance, and ordered the Filipinos
+surrounded.
+
+Taken by surprise, the Tagals were dumfounded, and for half a minute
+knew not what to do. Then they started to run, but this movement came
+too late, and four went down at the first volley from the newly
+arrived men. The others, realizing their helplessness, threw down
+their arms and surrendered.
+
+"Had it hot, eh, captain," said the North Dakota man to Ben as he came
+up with a quizzical smile on his round face, from which the
+perspiration was pouring in a stream.
+
+"Yes," panted Ben. "You came up in the nick of time, and I must thank
+you for--"
+
+"That's all right, captain--no more than you would do for me, and I
+know it." The North Dakota man shook hands. "It's been a long running
+fight to-day," he added. "Where is your command?"
+
+"That remains to be found out," answered Ben. "Have you seen any of
+them during the last two hours? I and one of my men became separated
+from them in the cane-brakes."
+
+"I guess you'll find them up near Baliuag. Most of the troops are up
+there. But I wouldn't try going around by this road, for the rebels
+are scattered in small bands all over this territory. You'll find the
+main road all right."
+
+"What will you do with these prisoners?"
+
+"Take them up to the main road and send to the colonel for orders."
+
+"Then I will go with you," said Ben, and spoke to the others about it.
+Soon the whole party was on the way, Sorrel and Jeming carrying the
+dead form of Sergeant Kaser between them, with Casey trudging near to
+give them a lift whenever necessary.
+
+It was now growing dark, and looked as if a thunderstorm was at
+hand. Seeing this, the detachment pushed forward rapidly, until at
+last the main road was gained. Here, from one of the drivers of a
+quartermaster's turnout, they learned that Ben's regiment had gone
+into temporary camp on the outskirts of the town of Baliuag, which was
+a mile further on. A number of Americans were missing, having
+become lost in a manner similar to Ben and Casey.
+
+The young captain now lost no time in marching forward once more, and
+reached his regiment in less than half an hour. He found his company
+in charge of Gilmore. Many had given him up for dead, and they were
+delighted at his reappearance.
+
+"We can't do without you," said the acting first lieutenant. And as he
+shook hands his honest face showed that he meant what he said.
+
+"And I don't know that I can do without my company," replied Ben.
+"Anyway, I'm awfully glad to be back. In the future, I must be a
+little more careful about keeping the boys in sight."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+NEWS FROM HOME
+
+
+It was evident that the majority of the insurgents had now had enough
+of fighting, for while the engagement just mentioned was taking place,
+General Luna of the Filipinos sent forward his chief of staff to
+General MacArthur, with a request that hostilities cease, pending a
+conference of Americans and Filipinos looking toward a settlement of
+existing difficulties.
+
+But our leaders knew only too well what delay meant, and refused to
+enter into any compact unless the natives first threw down their arms.
+The Filipinos wanted their freedom, but events had now so shaped
+themselves that absolute freedom for them appeared to be out of the
+question. So the conference practically amounted to nothing. And while
+this was taking place, General Hale began to move eastward to join
+General Lawton's command on its march toward San Isidro. It was the
+policy of all the American commanders to give the Filipinos no rest
+during the short time left to them before the heaviest of the rainy
+season set in.
+
+A rest of two days did Ben's company a world of good. Communications
+with Malolos were now opened, and supplies were coming forward
+rapidly. With the supply wagons came Carl Stummer, just from the
+hospital and still somewhat "shaky," but eager to be again on the
+firing line.
+
+"I could not dink me of stayin' any longer," he said, as he shook
+hands all around. "Der docther say, 'You vos besser here,' und I say,
+'I ton't gits me no besser bis I schmell dot powder purning vonce more
+alretty!'"
+
+"Well, it's powdher ye'll be afther shmellin' soon," put in Dan Casey.
+"It's forward we go to-morrow, so th' colonel is afther sayin'."
+
+"Goot!" said Carl. Then he added with a faint smile. "You see, Tan, I
+vos afraid you kill all dem Filibenos off pefore I could git here."
+
+"Sure an' I saved a couple fer ye, Carl," replied his chum. "Ye'll not
+be wantin' fer a scrap, I'll warrant!" And then he related his own and
+Ben's adventures, to which the German volunteer listened with much
+interest.
+
+The wagon train had brought in the mail, and this included the usual
+letters for Ben--one from Walter and the other from Uncle Job Dowling.
+Ben breathed a long sigh as he opened the communications.
+
+ "I'm going to spring a surprise on you," so wrote Walter. "I've
+ been reading the newspapers, and it makes me weary to think that I
+ am just cruising around with our squadron doing nothing, while you
+ and Larry are right in it, head and heels. I've applied for a
+ transfer to one of the warships in Manila waters, and it may be
+ that before this reaches you I will be on the bounding Pacific on
+ my way to join you and Larry in our fight with Aguinaldo and his
+ supporters. Si Doring, my old Yankee chum, has applied with me, so
+ we'll probably come on together, and when we get there you and
+ Larry will have to look to your laurels, that's all."
+
+"Dear Walter!" murmured Ben, after reading the letter twice. "What
+will he say when he hears that Larry is missing? If Larry doesn't show
+up, it will break his heart, and it will break mine, too!" And he
+brushed away the tears that sprang up in spite of his efforts to keep
+them down. Then he turned to the heavy, twisted scrawl from his Uncle
+Job.
+
+ "It's rare good news you have sent, Ben," wrote the old man, after
+ stating that he was in good health, "and the news comes none too
+ soon, for the party who took a mortgage on my house wants his
+ money, and where I am going to get it I don't know, with money so
+ tight and interest and bonus so high. I've told him that Braxton
+ Bogg is captured,--and he saw it in the newspaper, too,--and he is
+ about of a mind to wait for his money now until the bank gets back
+ what was stolen, and settles up. For myself, I can't hardly wait
+ till that time comes; and after this you can be sure I'll be
+ mighty careful where I put my cash and what's coming to you three
+ boys, too. You won that thousand dollars' reward fairly, and I
+ hope you and Larry won't squander it like most soldiers would. I
+ thought that war would end soon, but it appears like it would go
+ on forever. Tell Larry to take good care of himself, and mind that
+ you don't get shot."
+
+"Poor Uncle Job--he'll be in a hole again," murmured Ben. "Evidently
+he wrote this right after I sent word Braxton Bogg was caught, and he
+doesn't know anything of my being shot and getting over it, and of
+Benedicto Lupez skipping out with what Bogg stole. Hang the luck, but
+everything seems to be going wrong." And Ben grated his teeth, in a
+mood hard to explain.
+
+"What's up, Ben?" The question came from Gilbert, who had just come up
+to watch the young captain, in considerable surprise.
+
+Ben showed the two communications. "I'm just thinking of what I had
+best write to my Uncle Job," he returned. "I'm afraid it will break
+the old fellow's heart to learn that the money is gone--and after he
+is trying to turn over a new leaf, too."
+
+"And the news about Larry will cause him pain, too, I reckon."
+
+"No doubt, but--but--well, between you and me, Gilbert, I'm afraid the
+money will hurt the worst--Uncle Job always did set such a store by a
+few dollars. As for me, I'd give all I'll ever be worth if only I knew
+Larry was safe," concluded the young captain, arising from a seat
+under a palm tree as Major Morris came forward to speak to him.
+
+"Captain, I'm ordered to the front to-night, to do a little
+reconnoitring," said the major of the first battalion. "I thought
+perhaps you would like to go out with me. Possibly we can again get on
+the track of that Bogg fortune;" and he smiled faintly, for he had
+been with Ben on the night Braxton Bogg had been first made a
+prisoner.
+
+"I'll go out with you gladly," answered the young captain, promptly.
+"But I doubt if that money is ever found--or my brother Larry,
+either," he added, with bitterness.
+
+"Oh, cheer up, captain, you are blue to-night. Come, a little danger
+will put you on your mettle once more, and you'll forget all about
+this thing--although I'll allow it's enough to make anybody
+heart-sick."
+
+Supper was served, and the sun had long since sunk to rest over the
+vast plain and ocean to the westward, when Ben and Major Morris set
+out, taking with them an ample supply of ammunition and likewise a
+day's rations, for they were to move directly into the heart of the
+enemy's country and might be absent for a day or longer. The object
+of their going was to find out if a certain Lieutenant Caspard, who
+had deserted the American ranks, was with the rebels now gathering at
+Maasin, and if so, whether or not he was acting as an officer of the
+Filipino forces. If they could catch the deserter and bring him back,
+they were to be well rewarded. Strange to say, the orders were not to
+shoot him if it could be avoided.
+
+"It's a strange mission," said Major Morris, as they set out. "But
+such are Colonel Darcy's orders, and he is backed up in them by the
+general. Between you and me, I think this Caspard has been playing a
+double game between our forces and those of the Filipinos, and those
+at headquarters want to find out just what it means. One man told me
+that this Caspard was out of his head, and had an idea that he could
+stop the war by telling the rebels we would grant them everything they
+want if only they would throw down their arms."
+
+"Would the rebels swallow such a yarn?"
+
+"Some of the more ignorant might. But that isn't the point; Caspard
+may have given them some military information of vast importance. You
+must remember we are in a territory that may be full of pitfalls for
+us," concluded the major.
+
+Ben thought but little of the ending of this speech at the time, but
+had good cause to remember it before midnight. On they pushed past the
+picket guard and on to a side road which it was said would bring them
+around to the north side of Maasin. Both were in fairly good humor by
+this time, and the major told many an anecdote of army life which made
+Ben laugh outright. The major saw that his companion was indeed
+"blue," and was bound to dispel the blues if it could be done.
+
+"And that story puts me in mind of one on General Grant," he continued
+presently. "Grant was sitting in his tent one night when--"
+
+"Hush!" interrupted Ben, and caught his companion by the shoulder.
+Then he pointed into the semi-darkness ahead. "Are those rebels, or
+friends?"
+
+The road they were pursuing was, for the most part, a winding one. But
+they had now gained a straight stretch, the farther end of which was
+somewhat in the open. Looking in that direction Ben had discerned six
+or seven figures stealing silently along, guns on shoulders and packs
+on their backs.
+
+Major Morris came to a halt and surveyed the figures attentively. "I
+don't believe they are our men," he whispered. "None of the troops
+came as far as this--so the general stated."
+
+"Then, if they are rebels, what have they been doing?" went on Ben.
+"See, they have picks and shovels and axes."
+
+"Perhaps it's an engineering corps," and the major laughed softly at
+what he considered his little joke. "These Tagals are bound to be
+up-to-date, you know."
+
+"Well, if they are an engineering corps, what have they been doing?"
+demanded the young captain, who felt by no means satisfied at his
+companion's words.
+
+"I'll give it up--no, I won't, I'll go forward and investigate," came
+from the major. "There they go, around the turn, and walking just as
+fast as they can. If we want to catch up to them, we will have to
+hurry."
+
+"We don't want to get too close, major. They are not the game we are
+after, remember."
+
+"True, captain, but it won't do any harm to find out what we can of
+them. We may be doing General Lawton a great service by such an
+action."
+
+The night was cloudy, and as they pushed forward to the bend in the
+road it became darker than ever, until they could see hardly anything
+of what was ahead of them. The way was evidently little used, for the
+grass grew thickly even in the centre of the highway.
+
+The pair were going on, side by side, and with eyes strained to catch
+sight of those who had gone before, when suddenly Major Morris felt
+the ground giving way beneath him. "My gracious!" he ejaculated, and
+caught Ben by the arm. At the same instant the young captain uttered a
+cry, and also felt himself going down. Then came the snapping of
+slender bamboo poles, and the scattering of some loose grass, and down
+into darkness and space shot the pair, swallowed up utterly by a hole
+which had unexpectedly opened to receive them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+IN AND OUT OF A STRANGE PITFALL
+
+
+Major Morris and Ben had fallen into a pit dug by the Filipinos for
+the purpose of catching their enemies. It was an old trick, and one
+which had been used quite extensively at the opening of the rebellion,
+but which was now falling into disuse, for the reason that few
+Americans were ever caught by the device.
+
+The method was to dig a square hole in the centre of some trail or
+road which the Americans would probably use in their advance. At the
+bottom of this hole would be planted upright a number of sharp bamboo
+sticks, and then the top would be covered over with slender bamboo
+sticks and loose grass or palm leaves. If one or more persons stepped
+upon the top sticks, they would break at once, and the unfortunates
+would fall upon the sharp points below, which were certain to inflict
+more or less serious injury.
+
+Fortunately, however, for the young captain and his companion, the
+hole into which they had tumbled was not provided with the sharp
+sticks mentioned. The natives had just finished the opening when an
+officer had called upon them to leave the vicinity as it was getting
+dangerous, owing to the rapid advances made by the Americans. So the
+trap had been set with its most dangerous element lacking.
+
+Yet the fall was by no means a pleasant one, and for a brief instant
+the young captain of Company D thought that the bottom had dropped out
+of everything, and that he would surely be killed. He tried to catch
+hold of something, but all he could reach was the major's shoulder,
+and then both landed with a thud on the soft dirt left at the bottom
+of the hole.
+
+Ben was the first on his feet, which was not saying much, since the
+bottom of the opening was not level, and he stood in the soft loam up
+to his ankles. Shaking himself to find that no bones were broken, he
+drew a long breath.
+
+"Major, are you all right?" he asked.
+
+"No--no--I'm not all--all right," came with a gasp. "I've had my
+wi--wind knocked ou--out of me."
+
+"Any bones broken?"
+
+"I gue--guess not. But wh--who ever heard of such a con--founded
+trick?"
+
+"I've heard of it several times, major. But we are not as bad off as
+we might have been had the rebels put some sharp sticks down here to
+spit us with."
+
+"True." Major Morris gave a grunt, and wiped the dirt from his eyes.
+"Well, I reckon we've learned what their engineering corps was up
+to."
+
+This was said so dryly that in spite of his discomfiture Ben was
+compelled to laugh.
+
+"Yes, we've learned. The question is, now we are down here, how are we
+going to get out?"
+
+"Better make a light and see how deep the hole is first," replied the
+commander of the first battalion.
+
+Fortunately Ben had plenty of matches with him, and striking one, he
+lit a bamboo stalk and held it up as a torch. By the flickering light
+thus afforded they saw that the hole was about eight feet wide and
+twice as long. The level of the road above was fully eight feet over
+their heads.
+
+"Looks as if we were in a box, eh, captain?" said the major, grimly.
+
+"We're certainly in a hole," responded Ben. "But I think we can get
+out without much trouble. I wish we had a spade."
+
+"Well, wishing won't bring one, and there is nothing here to take the
+place of one, either."
+
+"Nothing but our hands. Here, if you'll hold the light, I'll see what
+I can do."
+
+"Here is a bit of a flat stick, try that," rejoined Major Morris; and
+taking the article mentioned, Ben set to work with vigor, attacking
+one end of the hole by loosening the dirt so that a large portion of
+it soon fell at their feet. Standing upon the fallen portion he
+continued his operations, and presently more of the dirt fell, leaving
+an incline up which both began to scramble on hands and knees. It was
+not a very dignified thing to do, but it was far better than to remain
+in the hole, and besides, there was nobody at hand to comment on the
+want of dignity in the movement.
+
+"We are well out of that," began Major Morris, brushing off his
+clothing as he spoke. "In the future--"
+
+"Hold on, major, somebody is coming," interrupted Ben, and pulled his
+companion back. He had seen a faint light advancing toward them, from
+a side road which joined the main road at a point but a few yards
+distant. Soon he made out a heavy cart approaching, drawn by a pair of
+caribaos, or water buffaloes. On the seat of the cart sat two
+sleepy-looking natives.
+
+"We must stop that cart," was the major's comment. "If we don't, there
+will be a bad smash-up."
+
+"I don't think it's a good plan to expose ourselves," replied Ben.
+
+"But do you want those chaps to break their necks?" demanded the
+commander of the first battalion. "More than likely they are
+_amigos_."
+
+"I've got a plan for warning them, major."
+
+As Ben spoke he picked up some of the driest of the grass and palm
+leaves and applied a match to the stuff. It blazed up readily, and he
+threw the mass in with the other stuff about the edge of the hole.
+
+"There, if they can't see that they must be blind," he said. "Come,
+let us get out," and off they ran for the thicket close at hand. From
+here they watched the cart and saw it come to a halt near the hole and
+knew that the turnout was safe.
+
+"I shouldn't think the rebels would care to leave those holes about,"
+was Major Morris' comment, as they pushed on once more. "They are as
+dangerous to their own people as they are to us."
+
+"I suppose they tell their own people about them."
+
+"Those men on the buffalo cart evidently knew nothing."
+
+"The rebels don't care for the _amigos_. Their idea is, if a native is
+not with them, he is against them, and must suffer with the
+Americans."
+
+To play the part of spies in such a country as this was not easy, for
+the Americans were easily distinguished from the natives. Had Ben and
+the major spoken Spanish fluently, they might have passed for
+Spaniards, as each was tanned from constant exposure to the strong
+sun. But this could not be, and so they had to go ahead and trust to
+luck to see them through with their dangerous errand.
+
+At length they felt that they must be close to the enemy's picket
+line, and paused to consider the situation. Before them was a gentle
+slope, terminating at a small but deep stream which flowed into the
+Rio Grande River.
+
+"I think some of the rebels are over there," said the major, pointing
+to a hill, from the top of which could be seen a faint glow. "There is
+certainly a camp-fire back there."
+
+"There is a house just below us," returned Ben. "Or is it a mill?"
+
+"A mill most likely. They wouldn't build an ordinary dwelling right at
+the water's edge."
+
+"Perhaps the rebels are using the mill as a sort of headquarters. What
+do you say if we investigate?"
+
+The major agreed, and they began to pick their way along the stream.
+Soon they reached a rude bridge, and were on the point of crossing,
+when a sharp cry rang out from the building they were approaching.
+
+"Hullo, that's a woman's voice!" exclaimed Ben. "Somebody is in
+trouble."
+
+"Help! thief! murderer!" came in Spanish. "Oh, help, for the love of
+kind Heaven, help!"
+
+"It's a woman, true enough!" ejaculated the major. "I wonder what the
+trouble is?"
+
+"I'm going to find out," answered Ben. The cry for aid appealed to his
+heart, and he bounded toward the mill-house, for such the building
+proved to be, without further hesitation. Nor was Major Morris far
+behind him.
+
+As they came closer they saw that the structure was dark, saving for a
+faint light that came from one of the rooms built over the mill
+stream. It was in this room, evidently, that some sort of struggle was
+going on, for now both heard the cry for help repeated, followed by
+the overturning of a table. Then came the voices of two men, and the
+cry came to a sudden end.
+
+"Two men are misusing some woman," cried Ben, "come on!" and rushing
+around to the front of the building, he found the rickety stairs
+leading to the house floor, and bounded upward. The door at the top
+stood ajar and he pushed it in, with Major Morris at his heels. The
+room at hand was dark, the struggle was going on in the apartment next
+to it.
+
+Ben paused long enough to see that his pistol had not sustained any
+injury in the tumble into the hole, and was ready for use, and then
+threw open the door before him.
+
+The light in the room was not very bright, but coming out of the
+darkness Ben could see but little, for a few seconds. The room was
+thick with the smoke of cigarettes, and through the haze the young
+captain made out two men standing beside an overturned table, one with
+a knife in his hand. To his intense surprise the men were Americans
+and dressed in the uniforms of regulars.
+
+"What does this mean?" he demanded. "What are you--"
+
+And then Ben got no further, for a swift look around the room told him
+that the two men were alone--that the woman he had heard crying for
+help was not there.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+THE ADVENTURE AT THE MILL-HOUSE
+
+
+For the moment it must be confessed that Ben was absolutely
+dumfounded, and Major Morris also. They had fully expected to see a
+woman in the hands of the regulars before them, and they could
+scarcely believe the evidence of their own senses.
+
+But if the officers were astonished, the men they confronted were
+likewise taken back, and stared in amazement, which quickly gave way
+to consternation.
+
+"What do you want?" demanded one, as soon as he could speak. And then
+he glanced over their shoulders to see if the newcomers were alone.
+
+"We thought we heard a woman in trouble," answered Ben, slowly.
+
+"And we did hear a woman," put in the major. "Where is she?"
+
+The two regulars exchanged unsteady glances, for each was somewhat the
+worse for liquor. "There ain't no woman here," answered one of them,
+sullenly.
+
+"Then who was crying for help?" persisted the young captain.
+
+"See here, cap'n, you are on the wrong trail," came from the older of
+the regulars. "Me and Bill's jest been having a little rumpus between
+ourselves. We meant no harm by it."
+
+"I don't believe you," came from Major Morris, promptly. "There is
+some mystery here, and as sure as you're born I'm going to find out
+what it is!" he went on.
+
+The major had scarcely finished when Ben's eyes fell to the floor, and
+he saw the outline of a trap-door under one of the regular's feet. One
+edge of the door was raised about half an inch above the floor proper,
+as if the door had been opened and not put back evenly into place.
+
+"Major, look at that trap-door!" he cried. "I'll wager they used it
+while we were coming up the outside stairs."
+
+"You must be right, captain. If you'll--"
+
+"We didn't use no trap-door," shouted the younger of the regulars, but
+he appeared much disconcerted over the discovery Ben had made.
+
+"Captain, I have them covered," came from Major Morris, as he brought
+out the two pistols with which he had wisely provided himself.
+"Perhaps you had better investigate."
+
+"I will," returned the young captain, and backed out of the room. The
+regulars wanted to stop him, but aiming his weapons at them the major
+told them to hold their peace.
+
+"If everything is all right, you won't be harmed," he said. "But it
+doesn't look right to me. You have no business here, for one thing."
+
+"And what business have you here?" demanded the older regular. And
+then he changed his manner. "We were captured in the fight of last
+week, and were just trying to get back to our lines again."
+
+"We'll talk about that when my friend the captain gets back, my man.
+If we are treating you unjustly, I'll apologize and do the handsome
+thing by you," he added.
+
+In the meantime Ben was making his way down to the bank of the stream,
+under the mill, with all possible speed. It was extremely dark, and he
+had to pick his way with caution for fear of tumbling into some ugly
+hollow. Below the mill was a fall of water, and here the stream ran
+between a series of sharp rocks.
+
+Ben had just gained the bank of the stream when a low moan reached
+his ears. At first he could not locate the sound, but presently
+discovered that it came from the vicinity of the rocks. Feeling his
+way along he managed, but not without great difficulty, to gain the
+top of the rocks. Here he saw the water foaming and boiling twenty
+feet below.
+
+"That woman must be down there," he muttered. Then he raised his
+voice. "Where are you?"
+
+"Down here, by the rocks!" came back faintly. "Help! please help me!"
+
+Locating the voice as well as he was able, the young captain began
+crawling down from one rock to another. This was difficult work, and
+he had to move with extreme care for fear of a tumble, which would
+land him directly into the boiling stream. At last, however, he found
+himself perched on a bit of a shelf, with the water less than two feet
+away.
+
+From this point of view he beheld the sufferer, who was swinging in
+the water, with her arms tightly clutching a sharp stone which reared
+its point just above the surface of the stream. He saw that she was
+evidently a Spanish woman, well along in years, and that her dress was
+sadly torn, and her long hair was floating loosely over her neck and
+face.
+
+It must be confessed that the young captain was perplexed over the
+situation that confronted him. The sufferer was just beyond his reach,
+and he felt that to plunge into the water after her would be to take a
+big risk, for if the stream at this point was over his waist, the
+force of the current would carry him off in an instant.
+
+"Can you hold on a few minutes longer?" he called out.
+
+[Illustration: "Can you hold on a few minutes longer?"--_Page 173._]
+
+"No! no! I am too weak," came more faintly than ever. "Help me
+quickly, and Heaven will reward you!"
+
+"I will do what I can--but you must hold tight for a minute," answered
+Ben.
+
+Just above his head a number of bushes were growing, and among these
+he had espied a long, stout-looking shoot. Clambering to this, he
+pulled out his pocket-knife and cut it off. Then he leaped down once
+more, and holding tight to the rocks with one hand, shoved out the
+branch with the other. "Catch hold, if you can," he cried.
+
+The woman understood and gave up the rock for the stick, and Ben
+pulled her toward him. It was no easy task, and once it looked as if
+she would lose her hold and be swept away. But in a minute the danger
+was past, and the young captain was hauling her up to where he stood.
+She was thoroughly exhausted, and no sooner did he have her in his
+arms than she fainted.
+
+One difficulty had been overcome, but another still remained, and that
+was to get up to the safe ground above the rocks. But once again the
+bushes growing out of the crevices came into play, and, hauling
+himself from one to another, Ben at last found himself safe, with his
+burden resting heavily over his shoulder.
+
+It was now that the young captain found the woman was suffering
+from a blow over the left temple, from which the blood was slowly
+trickling. Laying the form down, he brought out his handkerchief and
+bound up the wound as well as he was able. This had just been
+accomplished when the sufferer came again to her senses and stared
+around her in bewilderment.
+
+"You--you--am I safe?" she asked, in broken English, but in a sweet
+voice which went straight to Ben's heart.
+
+"Yes, madam, you are safe," he answered. "Did those two men throw you
+into the stream?"
+
+"Yes, yes! Oh, they are villains, señor--great villains."
+
+"I must say they look it, even if they are of our troops," replied the
+young captain. "Come, do you think you can walk back to the mill with
+me?"
+
+The woman said she would try, and he assisted her to her feet. She was
+still very weak, and readily consented to lean on his arm; and thus
+they moved slowly back the way the captain of Company D had come.
+
+During all this time Ben had not heard a sound from the house, and he
+was anxious to know how Major Morris was faring, although feeling
+positive that the major was fully capable of taking care of himself.
+Now, as they came closer, he heard loud talking.
+
+"We ain't goin' to stay, major,--an' it ain't right fer you to ask us
+to," the older of the regulars was saying.
+
+"You will stay, and that's the end of it," came in the major's
+clean-cut tones. "If you attempt to pass through that doorway, I'll
+put a bullet through you."
+
+"But we are friends, major, and--"
+
+"I don't know that I am a friend to you. It depends upon what my
+companion the captain will have to report when he gets back."
+
+"He won't have nuthin' to report, so far as we are concerned," put in
+the younger regular. "We ain't done any wrong, 'ceptin' to quarrel a
+bit between us. Everybody has a set-to once in a while, you know."
+
+By this time Ben was tramping up the outside stairs, supporting the
+woman as before. Now he pushed his way into the outer room of the
+mill-house, the woman following with some hesitancy. At the appearance
+of their late victim the regulars fell back as though struck a blow.
+
+"Nice sort of chaps you are," exclaimed Ben, hotly. "You don't deserve
+to wear Uncle Sam's uniform. A set of prison stripes would suit both
+of you much better."
+
+"Hullo, you've found the lady," cried the major. "Sit down, madam, and
+tell us what this means."
+
+A bench was handy, and the sufferer dropped heavily upon it. The
+regulars looked as if they wished themselves anywhere but in their
+present situation, yet they did not dare to budge, for Major Morris
+still held "the drop" upon them, and the commander of the first
+battalion looked as if he would stand no nonsense.
+
+"These men came here to rob me," said the woman, slowly. "They are of
+your kind, but they are not honest."
+
+"Then they are not of our kind," answered Ben, promptly. "We do not
+allow our soldiers to rob anybody."
+
+"We didn't come to steal--" began the older regular, when Major Morris
+stopped him.
+
+"Silence! Not another word until the lady has finished her story."
+
+There was a second of painful silence, and the lady continued: "I am
+staying at the mill alone, for my husband has gone to the Laguna de
+Bay on business. Several hours ago, these two soldiers came in and
+demanded that I serve them with a hot supper. Not wishing to have
+trouble I gave them the best I had. But they were not satisfied, and
+broke into my husband's wine closet and drank two bottles of his
+choicest wine, and smoked his best cigarettes, package after package.
+Then, after drinking much wine, they demanded that I give them money,
+and that man," pointing to the older prisoner, "told his companion
+that I must have money hidden somewhere, as all the Spanish
+mill-owners in Luzon were rich, while the truth is, we are very poor,
+as the war has taken away everything. Then the men drank more, and at
+last they caught hold of me and threatened me with great violence if I
+did not give up what I had hidden away. I gave them the little silver
+I had, but they were not satisfied, and when I tried to run away, one
+hit me over the head with this bench. Then they plotted to get me out
+of the way entirely and go on a hunt for money themselves. I cried
+louder than ever, and then you started to come in. One of the men had
+opened that trap leading to the river, and as you came up the outer
+stairs both dropped me down, no doubt to drown me. I was swept down to
+the rocks at the falls, and there the _capitan_ saved me, God bless
+him for it."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+NEWS OF LARRY
+
+
+For a minute after the Spanish woman finished, nobody in the
+mill-house spoke. Her tale had impressed both Ben and the major
+deeply, and they looked with cold contempt at the two regulars who had
+so disgraced the uniform they wore.
+
+"This is a fine doings, truly," said Major Morris, at length. "I
+wonder what your commander will say when he hears of it."
+
+"If you please, they have deserted the American army," put in the
+woman. "They said as much while they were drinking my husband's
+wine."
+
+"It ain't so!" burst out the older regular, fiercely. "And that woman
+has told you a string of--"
+
+"Shut up!" interrupted the major, sternly. "I will take this lady's
+word against yours every time--after what I have witnessed of both of
+you. Your name, please?"
+
+"I ain't telling my name jest now," was the sullen response.
+
+"Aren't you?" Up came the major's pistol again. "Your name, I said."
+
+"Jack Rodgrew."
+
+"And what is yours?" went on the commander of the first battalion,
+turning to the younger regular.
+
+The man hesitated for a second. "My name is Jerry Crossing."
+
+"Indeed! How is it your mate called you Bill awhile ago?"
+
+"Why--er--er--"
+
+"I don't believe either of the names is correct," went on the major.
+
+"He is called Bill, and the other is Yadder," put in the Spanish
+woman. "I heard the names many times."
+
+"Then that will answer, since I also have your company and regiment.
+Now, then, throw down your cartridge belts."
+
+"Throw 'em down?" howled the regular called Bill.
+
+"That is what I said. Throw them down at once."
+
+"But see here, major--"
+
+"I won't stop to argue with you. Throw the belts down, or take the
+consequences."
+
+"And what will the consequences be?" questioned Yadder.
+
+"The consequences will be that I will form myself into a court-martial,
+find you guilty of desertion, and shoot you down where you stand.
+Come, do those belts go down or not?"
+
+"I reckon they go down," grumbled Yadder; and unloosening the article,
+he allowed it to slip to the floor, seeing which, his companion
+followed suit.
+
+"Now both of you hold your hands over your heads, while Captain
+Russell searches you for concealed weapons."
+
+"We ain't got no concealed weapons."
+
+"I didn't ask you to talk, I told you to hold up your hands."
+
+With exceeding bad grace the two deserters, for such they really
+proved to be, held up their arms. Approaching them, Ben went through
+one pocket after another and felt in their bosoms. Each had a long
+native knife, such as are usually used in the rice-fields.
+
+"I suppose you do not call those concealed weapons," was Major
+Morris's comment, as Ben came over to him with the knives and the
+cartridge belts. The rascals' guns stood back of the door behind the
+commander of the first battalion.
+
+"It ain't fair to take everything away from us," began Yadder, when
+two shots, fired in rapid succession, cut him short. The shots came
+from up the stream and not over fifty yards from the mill-house. Soon
+followed a shouting of voices, and all in the place knew that a band
+of rebels were approaching.
+
+"They are after somebody!" exclaimed Ben. "They are coming--"
+
+The young captain got no further, for just then there sounded a
+clatter on the outer steps, and a second later an American soldier
+burst into the mill-house. He was in tatters, and his left arm hung
+limply by his side, for he had been shot in the shoulder.
+
+"Americans!" he gasped, as he cast a hurried glance about. "Thank God
+for that! The rebels are after me, half a dozen strong."
+
+"He went up into the house!" came from without, in the Tagalog
+dialect.
+
+"After him, men, the _Americano_ must not escape us!"
+
+And then footsteps were heard around the house and on the stairs. Ben
+and the major looked at each other questioningly. What was to be
+done?
+
+"The trap," whispered the young captain. "If they come up here, we can
+escape through that."
+
+There was no time to say more, for already the rebels were coming up
+the stairs, shouting loudly for the escaped _Americano_ to give
+himself up. They advanced in a body, evidently not caring to separate
+in the darkness, and thinking to find the man alone.
+
+With quick wit Ben ran and placed the table against the door, and on
+this piled the bench.
+
+"Now the trap, and be quick!" he whispered, and Major Morris
+understood. Flinging open the door in the floor he looked down, to
+behold the stream flowing beneath.
+
+"Follow me--it's the best way out," he said to the escaped prisoner.
+Then he dropped down, holding his pistols over his head, that they
+might not get wet.
+
+The wounded man was in a desperate humor and lost no time in
+following. By this time the rebels were hammering lustily on the door
+which Ben was holding shut.
+
+"What are we to do?" demanded the older of the deserters. "Are you--"
+
+"You can take care of yourselves," answered the young captain, and
+rushing over to the trap-door he let himself through, closing the trap
+after him. Then came a plunge into the water, but the stream here was
+less than four feet deep, and he followed Major Morris and the wounded
+man to the bank without difficulty. A loud shouting came from
+overhead, followed by a storm of words from both rebels and deserters,
+and also from the Spanish woman. Fortunately for the woman, among the
+rebels was a nephew, who at once came to her aid, and had the two
+deserters from the American army made prisoners.
+
+"We had better put a little distance between ourselves and that mill,"
+suggested Major Morris, as all three shook the water from their lower
+garments.
+
+"How is it? are you badly wounded?" asked Ben, turning to their newly
+made companion.
+
+"Oh, I can go ahead," said the soldier. "It's rather painful,
+though."
+
+"We'll take care of it for you at the first chance we get," added Ben;
+and then the three set off at a brisk pace along the stream and over
+the rocks to a grove in which they felt they would be comparatively
+safe until daylight, if no longer.
+
+As the mill-house was left behind, all became quiet, and in the grove
+nothing disturbed them but the hum of the insects and the occasional
+cry of some night bird.
+
+Lighting a match, Ben examined the man's wound and bound it up with
+the major's handkerchief, his own having been left behind with the
+Spanish woman. The stranger said that his name was Barton Brownell.
+
+"I have been a prisoner of the insurgents for some time," he said,
+when asked to tell his story. "I was captured just before our troops
+took Malolos. They had six prisoners all told, and they took us to a
+place called Guinalo, which is probably forty miles from here, and up
+in the mountains."
+
+"While you were a prisoner did you see or hear anything of a
+Lieutenant Caspard?" asked Major Morris, quickly.
+
+"To be sure I did!" burst out Barton Brownell. "He came to see me
+several times. He has joined hands with the insurgents, and he wanted
+me to join them, too. But I told him I would rot first," added the
+wounded man, and his firmness showed that he meant what he said.
+
+"And was Caspard in the field with the rebels?"
+
+"Yes. He was hand in glove with General Luna and the other rebel
+leaders, and I think he had turned over some messages from General
+Otis's headquarters to the rebels. But, candidly speaking, I think
+Lieutenant Caspard is somewhat off in his head. Once he came to me and
+said that if only I and the other prisoners would join him, we could
+end this shedding of blood inside of a week."
+
+"He must be crazy, to join the rebels," put in Ben. "Does he hold any
+position under them?"
+
+"They call him _capitan_, but if he has such a position, it is merely
+a nominal one. I think the natives are beginning to suspect that he is
+not quite right in his mind. But still they love to hear him praise
+them, and they swallow a good bit of what he says, like so many
+children."
+
+For the moment Major Morris was silent. Then he turned to Ben. "Our
+mission seems to have come to a sudden end," he said. "Brownell can
+tell Colonel Darcy all he wants to know." And he related to the
+escaped prisoner the reason for their coming beyond the American
+lines.
+
+"Yes, I reckon I can tell the colonel well enough," answered Barton
+Brownell. "For I saw Caspard often, as I mentioned before, and he
+never knew what it was to keep his tongue from wagging."
+
+"And how did you escape?" asked Ben, with interest.
+
+"In a very funny way," and the soldier laughed. "As I said before, we
+were kept up in the mountains, in a large cave. There were six of our
+troop, but all told the prisoners numbered twenty-eight. There was a
+guard of four rebels to keep us from escaping, and an old woman called
+Mother Beautiful, because she was so ugly, used to cook our food for
+us--and the food was mighty scanty, I can tell you that.
+
+"Well, one day two of the guards went off, leaving the old woman and
+the other two guards in sole charge. There had been a raid of some
+kind the day before, and the guards had some fiery liquor which made
+them about half drunk. The old woman got mad over this, and she was
+more angry than ever when one of the guards refused to get her a pail
+of water from a neighboring spring. 'I'll get the water, mother,' says
+I, bowing low to her, and would you believe it, she made the two
+guards let me out, just to get her the water."
+
+"And the water hasn't arrived yet," said Major Morris, laughing.
+
+"No, the water hasn't arrived yet," answered Barton Brownell. "As soon
+as I reached the spring I dropped the pail and ran for all I was
+worth, and hid in the brush along the mountain side. I stayed there
+two days and nearly starved to death. Then they hunted me out, and I
+received this wound. But I escaped them and made my way through the
+jungle and over the rice-fields to here, and here I am."
+
+"You say there were twenty-eight prisoners all told," cried Ben. "Did
+you ever hear anything of my brother, Larry Russell?"
+
+"Larry Russell?" repeated Barton Brownell, thoughtfully. "To be sure I
+did. He is a sailor from the _Olympia_, isn't he?"
+
+"Yes! yes! And was he with you?"
+
+"He was, at first. But he wasn't when I left. They moved some of the
+prisoners away, and he was among them. So he was your brother? That
+beats all, doesn't it--to think I should fall in with you in such a
+place as this!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+THE ADVANCE UPON MAASIN
+
+
+Ben was much surprised and also delighted to learn that Barton
+Brownell had met Larry, and he lost no time in questioning the escaped
+soldier regarding his missing brother.
+
+"Yes, your brother was with me about two weeks," said Barton Brownell.
+"He came up with a detachment of rebels from the Laguna de Bay, after
+General Lawton left that territory."
+
+"And was he well, or had he been wounded?"
+
+"He was suffering from a cut in the head. A Spaniard had kicked
+him--and, yes, he told me it was a Spaniard that you and he were after
+for having robbed a bank of some money."
+
+"Benedicto Lupez!" ejaculated Ben, more astonished than ever.
+
+"That's the name. Your brother had run across that man and his brother
+at Santa Cruz, and he was trying to make this Benedicto Lupez a
+prisoner, when the brother kicked him in the head, and then both of
+them ran away, and when your brother realized what was going on again
+he found himself a prisoner. He was taken to a camp near the north
+shore of the Laguna de Bay, and afterward transferred to the cave
+where I was held."
+
+"I am thankful that he is alive," murmured the young captain, and
+breathed silent thanks to God for His mercy. "Do you know where they
+took Larry to?"
+
+"I can't say exactly, but I know that a great many of the rebels are
+retreating to the mountains back of San Isidro. I wouldn't be
+surprised to hear of Aguinaldo making his final stand there."
+
+"I would give all I am worth to gain my brother his liberty."
+
+"And I reckon he would give all he is worth to escape," rejoined
+Brownell. "The boys hate to be kept prisoners, and try all sorts of
+devices to get away. One fellow had some gold hidden on his person and
+tried to bribe a guard with it. But the guard only laughed at him and
+stole the money."
+
+"Of course you do not know what became of Benedicto Lupez and his
+brother."
+
+"No, your brother knew nothing further than that they ran off after
+the assault on him," concluded Brownell.
+
+The talking had somewhat exhausted the wounded man and Ben forbore to
+question him further just then. While Barton Brownell rested easily on
+some moss, the young captain turned to the commander of the first
+battalion.
+
+"What shall we do next, major?"
+
+"I think we had better be getting back," was the ready answer. "The
+sooner we report to the colonel the better he will be pleased."
+
+"I feel like pushing right through to San Isidro, on a hunt for my
+brother."
+
+"It would be a foolish movement, captain, for, unless I am greatly
+mistaken, the insurgents have a large force in front of us, and to
+attempt breaking through would be taking a big risk. Be thankful that
+your brother is safe thus far. As long as he remains quiet I don't
+think the rebels will harm him."
+
+Ben could not but believe that this was good advice, and he agreed to
+do as the major thought best. It was now three o'clock in the morning,
+and half an hour later they started, thinking to rejoin their command
+before daylight.
+
+It was an exhausting tramp, the more so because Brownell had to be
+assisted by one or the other for the entire distance.
+
+"I'm a great drag," sighed the wounded soldier. "Perhaps you had
+better push on and let me shift for myself." But the major and the
+captain would not hear of this.
+
+They had one little brush with two of the Filipino pickets before
+getting into the American lines, but the rebels were young men and not
+very courageous and let them slip by without great trouble.
+
+It was Major Morris who made the report to the colonel, taking Ben and
+Brownell with him. Colonel Darcy was greatly interested.
+
+"It is, then, as I supposed," he said. "This information will be of
+great value to us, Major Morris," and he thanked the major and Ben for
+what they had done. Brownell's report was also received with close
+consideration by General Lawton himself.
+
+"If the prisoners have been taken to San Isidro, we must try our best
+to liberate them," said the general. "I am so glad to learn, though,
+that the rebels are not ill-treating them, as I had supposed."
+
+It was Ben, assisted by Casey, who saw Brownell to the hospital and
+had the wounded soldier given every attention. When they parted,
+Brownell, although now so exhausted that he could scarcely speak,
+shook the young captain's hand warmly.
+
+"I hope you find your brother soon," he said. "I can imagine how bad
+it makes you feel to know that he is a prisoner."
+
+The advance of General Lawton's command was now directed at Maasin, a
+few miles beyond Baliuag. It was led by Colonel Summers, who took with
+him some Oregon, Dakota, and Third Infantry troops and a battery of
+the Utah Light Artillery, with other troops following, including Ben's
+battalion with Major Morris at its head. As before, the advance was
+along the main road and through the rice-fields, cane-brakes, and the
+jungle, with the air so oppressive that it felt as though coming out
+of a steaming oven.
+
+"I dink me I vos right in it from der start, alretty!" exclaimed Carl
+Stummer, as he plodded along. "Dis vos vorse as der march on Malolos,
+eh, Tan?"
+
+"Sure, an' it's no picnic," replied the Irish volunteer. "But thin,
+Carl, me b'y, ye must remimber, we didn't come out here fer fun. We
+kem out fer to show thim haythins how to behave thimselves an' grow
+up into useful an' ornamental citizens av the greatest republic that
+iver brathed th' breath av life."
+
+"Chust so," returned the German volunteer. "But it vos uphill vork,
+ennahow," and he sighed deeply. Carl could fight as well as any
+old-time trooper, but the long tramps through the jungle always
+disgusted him.
+
+There was the river to cross upon which the mill-house was located,
+and Ben could not help but wonder if the Spanish woman was still at
+the structure, and how the American deserters had fared. But the
+mill-house was too far away to visit, and now the battalion was
+ordered into action on the upper side of the stream.
+
+"Gangway for General Lawton!" was the cry that reached Ben's ears a
+few minutes later, and then came a crashing of horses' hoofs, and the
+tall general rode through their open ranks, followed by several
+members of his staff. As was usual, the general was bound for the
+firing line, to personally direct the movements of the men under him.
+Many were the times that the members of his staff urged him not to
+make a target of himself. He would not listen; and in the end this
+daring exposure cost the gallant leader his life.
+
+But now all was excitement, for a large force of rebels had been
+uncovered and there was no telling but what the jungle ahead concealed
+even more. "We are up against it, fellows!" shouted one of the
+sergeants. "Let us rush 'em for keeps!" And on swept the battalion,
+until the steady pop-pop of Mausers and the crack of the Springfields
+could be heard upon every side.
+
+Ben's company was no longer as large as it had been, for death and
+disease had sadly depleted the ranks. Yet the forty-six men in the
+command were now thoroughly seasoned fighters, and all loved their
+young and dashing leader and would have followed him anywhere.
+
+Presently an orderly dashed up to Major Morris.
+
+"Major, Colonel Darcy wishes you to take your command up yonder hill.
+The rebels have a battery up there, as you can see. If you can rush
+the position, he will send another battalion to your support."
+
+"Tell Colonel Darcy I will obey the order," answered Major Morris.
+Then he turned to the four companies. "Boys, we are ordered to take
+yonder hill and the two field-pieces perched on top of it. Come on,
+and I will lead you!"
+
+He waved his sword and away went the first battalion on the double
+quick, two companies to the front. There was first a slight hollow to
+cross, and then came a thicket of brambles where many a uniform was
+reduced to rags. The battery at the top of the hill saw them coming
+and directed a heavy fire at their advance.
+
+"Hot work!" cried the major, as he ranged up alongside of Ben. "I am
+afraid the carrying out of this order will cost us dear."
+
+"If you'll allow me to make a suggestion, major--" began Ben.
+
+"Make a dozen, captain."
+
+"Why not take a course to the left then."
+
+"For what reason?"
+
+"There is a big rock on that side, on the very top of the hill."
+
+"But we can't climb that rock."
+
+"No, and neither can the rebels fire over it with their field-pieces.
+When we get up to the rock we can march around it."
+
+"Well spoken, Russell--you're a born strategist," cried the major, who
+was too generous to have any ill feeling because somebody offered him
+a suggestion. "We'll go that way." And he immediately gave necessary
+orders.
+
+But the advance was by no means easy, and soon the battalion found
+itself under such a galling fire that the men were glad enough to seek
+the shelter of every rock and bush which came handy. The battery could
+not do everything, and afraid of having his pieces taken from him, the
+captain had called upon several companies of the Filipinos to assist
+him in maintaining his position.
+
+"Down!" suddenly shouted Gilbert Pennington, and down went the men,
+and the next instant a shell burst directly over their heads.
+
+"This is hot and no mistake," murmured Ben. Then he turned to his
+command. "Forward, men, the sooner we take that position the better it
+will be for us." And up the hill he dashed, with Casey, Stummer, and
+the rest following as best they could, for the way was steep and
+uncertain. At last the very edge of the big rock was gained, and
+Company D poured around its left side, to find themselves suddenly
+confronted by a body of Tagalos fully a hundred strong. In the
+meantime the other companies under Major Morris were coming up on the
+opposite side of the rock. Ben was on the point of shouting some
+additional words of encouragement to his men, when he found himself
+face to face with a mighty Igorrote warrior, who with his long lance
+seemed determined to pierce the young captain through and through.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+CAMPING OVER A POWDER MAGAZINE
+
+
+Bang!
+
+It was the report of Ben's pistol, and the weapon was aimed directly
+for the Igorrote's head, for the young captain had learned the value
+of aiming and firing quickly.
+
+But the Filipino "had been there before," and as the trigger went down
+he dropped to the ground with the rapidity of lightning, and the
+bullet intended for him struck a man some distance in the rear. Then
+up leaped the Igorrote once more and bounded onward, the lance point
+aimed directly for Ben's throat!
+
+The young captain's pistol was now empty, the other shots having been
+discharged during the climb up the hill. His sword was out, but the
+lance was three times the length of the blade, so he was still at a
+disadvantage. Yet he aimed a blow at the barbed point and thus turned
+it aside.
+
+"Ha!" hissed the Filipino, and drew back. Then he struck again at
+Ben, and instantly both slipped on the moist grass and fell directly
+into each other's clutches. The Igorrote was a powerful warrior, and
+grasped Ben's throat with the tightness of a steel band.
+
+Ben tried to cry out, but not a sound could he make. His eyes bulged
+from their sockets, and he felt his breath leaving him. A second
+Igorrote leaped forward to hit him on the head with a war club, such
+as some of the Igorrote still insisted upon carrying. Of the use of
+rifles this tribe of the Filipinos knew little or nothing.
+
+"Back, ye nager!" came in Dan Casey's voice, and there followed a
+sickening thud, and down went the enemy with the club, his head split
+open by a blow from the Irish volunteer's gun-stock. Casey then aimed
+a second blow at the rebel who had hold of Ben, but not wishing to
+receive such a dose as had been meted out to his companion, the other
+Igorrote sprang up, butted Casey in the stomach with his head, thus
+landing the Irishman on his back, and then ran for his life toward the
+nearest shelter of brush.
+
+"Oh, be gracious! To look at that now!" spluttered the Irishman as he
+arose. "But I got wan av thim, anyhow, captain," he added, with a
+jerk of his thumb toward the Igorrote, who lay with a broken head.
+
+"Yes, Casey; and you saved me, too," returned Ben, earnestly. "You are
+worth two ordinary men;" and then captain and private drifted apart,
+as the tide of battle rolled forward.
+
+The top of the hill was gained, but for once the insurgents did not
+know when they were whipped, and held to their guns until more than
+half of their number were either killed or wounded. The contest raged
+to the right and the left of the battery, and this was fortunate, for
+seeing they could not hold the pieces, some of the rebels overcharged
+one of the guns and set it off, blowing it into a thousand pieces.
+Then the main body retreated into the jungle, carrying a few of their
+wounded with them.
+
+By this time it was raining again, and the downpour on the top of the
+hill was so great that little could be seen of the condition of
+affairs at a distance. Sending word that the hill was taken and one
+old-fashioned Spanish field-piece captured, Major Morris rallied his
+battalion around him and stood on the defensive. But the rebels had
+had enough of fighting for the present, and once again took up the
+retreat in the direction of San Isidro.
+
+"I reckon that was hot enough for anybody," said the major, as he
+stalked up to Ben and the other captains under him. "I wonder if
+anybody was killed by the explosion of that old cannon?"
+
+"Nobody was killed, but several were wounded," answered one of the
+captains. "The rebel who charged her up and then fired her had lots of
+nerve," he added.
+
+Word soon came back from General Lawton that the battalion should hold
+the hill until further orders. The situation was not a pleasant one,
+but orders must be obeyed, and the various companies proceeded to make
+themselves as comfortable as possible, which was not saying much,
+since the top of the hill afforded little or no shelter. One company
+was detailed to do picket duty, but a little scouting soon proved that
+the rebels were a mile or more distant.
+
+When the main body of the troops under General Lawton marched into
+Maasin, they found the pretty little town all but deserted. In a few
+of the huts the inhabitants remained, having hung out dirty white
+rags to show that they were _amigos_. Here were also numerous "Chinos"
+or Chinese, some of mixed blood, and all ready to do anything for the
+American soldiers, provided they were paid for it. Natives and
+"Chinos" went about bared to the waist, casting fearful eyes at those
+who had so suddenly disturbed the peace of their homesteads, for the
+inhabitants of Maasin were peaceably inclined, and took but little
+interest in the war Aguinaldo and his followers had instituted.
+
+"Well, we are one step nearer to San Isidro," remarked Gilbert, when
+he got the chance to talk to Ben. "I suppose we can't get there any
+too quick for you."
+
+"I don't know, Gilbert. You must remember that while Larry may be near
+San Isidro now, he may be miles off when we reach there. These
+Filipinos change their capital and their prisons as quickly as a flea
+jumps."
+
+"Never mind, we'll keep them on the jump until they drop," answered
+the young Southerner. "They can't stand up before us forever."
+
+"To my way of thinking, I don't believe this war will come to definite
+end, Gilbert."
+
+"What do you mean, Ben? They have got to stop sometime--or else we
+have got to stop."
+
+"These Filipinos are not pulling together--on the contrary, they are
+split up into half a dozen factions. If we defeat one faction, the
+others will still keep on, and, besides that, the worst of the rebels
+are of Malayan blood, pirates and bandits. I believe after we have
+whipped them as an army they will still keep on fighting in small
+bodies, somewhat after the order of the brigands in Mexico and
+northern Africa. With the mountains to fly to, such brigands could
+keep on worrying an American army for years."
+
+"Possibly; but when the main body of the natives see what we want
+to do for them, they'll be as anxious as we to wipe out such
+brigands, and with their own people after them, life will be pretty
+uncomfortable, I'll wager. To be sure, there will always be
+robbers, just as there are outlaws and train-wreckers in the western
+states of our own country."
+
+Some of the men had found a small opening between the rocks, and over
+this had hung their tents, making a rude shelter which Ben and Gilbert
+were glad to share with them. In the crowd were Casey and Stummer, and
+the latter busied himself in trying to make a cup of hot chocolate
+over a handful of dry twigs found in the shelter. The attempt was
+hardly a success, yet the drink was better for the convalescent than
+either water or liquor would have been.
+
+"Sure, an' if this shtorm kapes up, we'll all be dhrowned out," was
+Casey's comment, as he shifted his feet to keep them out of a rising
+puddle. "Now who would think the water would rise on the top av a
+hill. Things do be mighty peculiar in Luzon, an' that's a fact."
+
+"Never mind, Casey, you'll get back home some day," put in another
+soldier. "And in years to come you'll be telling your grandchildren
+what a mighty fighter you were out in the state of Luzon, recently
+annexed to the United States, along with the state of Hawaii." And a
+laugh went up over the conceit.
+
+"Sure an' you ton't haf nodding to grumble ofer of you ton't git
+shot," said Stummer.
+
+"Or don't get taken down with disease," put in another. "My, but I
+pity the fellows with fever and chills and malaria, and the other
+things that are just as bad. I believe about one-fifth of the army is
+now on the sick list."
+
+"Some of the boys are going to send a petition to General Otis for
+relief. They say they can't stand it much longer."
+
+So the talk went on, both Ben and Gilbert saying but little. Presently
+Major Morris poked his nose into the opening.
+
+"I think you boys had better come out of there," he said shortly.
+
+"Why, major--" began several.
+
+"Are we to advance?" asked others.
+
+"No, we are not going to advance, unless it's skyward," continued the
+major. "Either come out of that, or else put out that fire, and be
+mighty careful about it."
+
+"The fire ain't doing no harm," grumbled a private, under his breath.
+
+"I don't believe the enemy can see the smoke in this rain," suggested
+another, thinking that this was the cause of their being disturbed.
+
+"I'm not thinking of the enemy, boys, I'm thinking of you. Better come
+out, and then we'll put out that fire as carefully as we can."
+
+Seeing that something unusual was in the wind, one after another of
+the officers and privates came forth from the hollow, Stummer giving
+the fire a kick as he passed. As soon as they were outside they
+surrounded the commander of the first battalion.
+
+"Now, boys, do you know why I called you out?" asked Major Morris,
+with just the suspicion of a twinkle in his clear eyes.
+
+"No, why was it?" came from a dozen voices.
+
+"Because I wanted to save your lives," was the quiet response.
+
+"Save our lives, major? You must be joking."
+
+"No, I am not joking. We have just captured one of the rebel gunners,
+who was in command of the piece that was blown to atoms. He says that
+this hollow, where you had your camp-fire, was their powder magazine,
+and that they left all of a hundred and fifty pounds of powder stored
+there, hidden under the moss and dead leaves."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+THE RESULT OF AN AMBUSH
+
+
+"Good gracious, do you mean to say we have been camping over a powder
+magazine?" gasped Gilbert, as soon as he could speak.
+
+"Sure, an' it's a wondher we wasn't all blowed to hivin!" came from
+Dan Casey.
+
+"Und I boil mine chocolate so calmly as you blease," put in Carl
+Stummer, with a shudder. "Py chiminy, I ton't vos build no fire no
+more bis I vos sure of mine ground."
+
+For several minutes the excitement was intense, and all of the
+soldiers retreated to a considerable distance from the hollow which
+had proved such a comfortable shelter.
+
+Presently, however, Ben, Gilbert, and several others mustered up
+courage enough to go back and haul down the coverings put up. Then
+came another heavy downpour of rain, which speedily extinguished the
+fire; and the danger of an explosion was past.
+
+An examination under the rocks proved that the Filipino gunner had
+told the truth. The powder was there, in big cans bearing the old
+Spanish stamp. Some was marked 1876, and was so old as to be
+practically worthless.
+
+"They ought to have shot that off in honor of our centennial,"
+remarked the young captain. "I don't wonder the rebels can't hit
+anything. This powder has no carrying power left to it."
+
+Nevertheless the powder was carted off and added to the American
+stock. Then General Lawton rode up and Major Morris told in detail
+what had been accomplished.
+
+With the fall of Maasin came another day of much-needed rest for the
+majority of the troops under General Lawton. In the meantime, while
+these soldiers were advancing from Angat upon San Isidro, the command
+under General MacArthur was far from idle. The Filipino commissioners
+wanted a three months' armistice, in order that the terms of a peace
+might be discussed, but to this the Americans would not listen, as
+they felt the enemy wished mainly to gain time in which to reorganize
+their shattered forces.
+
+MacArthur's command was now in possession of Calumpit on the
+railroad, and Apalit, just above, on the Rio Grande; while the rebels
+in this territory began to mass at St. Tomas and at San Fernando,
+still further northward on the railroad. On May the 4th MacArthur's
+division set out from Apalit, with Hale's command on the right wing
+and Wheaton's on the left.
+
+It was not supposed that the rebels would make a serious stand short
+of San Fernando, but at St. Tomas they were developed in force, and a
+running fight ensued, lasting several hours, but without great loss to
+the Americans. Finding they could not hold St. Tomas, the Filipinos
+set fire to the town and fled. They were pursued with vigor, and
+attempted to burn San Fernando late that night, but failed to do so.
+
+Early in the morning the fighting was renewed, and near San Fernando
+another battle took place. But the rebels were disheartened by the
+defeat at St. Tomas, and were soon on the run, and General Hale drove
+them a mile beyond San Fernando. In taking possession of the town it
+was found that several of the public buildings were in ruins. The
+defensive works here were very strong, and had the Filipinos stood up
+to their work like real fighters, they might have held the position
+for a long time.
+
+On Saturday, May the 6th, Ben's command moved forward again, down the
+hill into Maasin, now patrolled by Americans, and then to the main
+road beyond.
+
+"I don't believe we are in for much of a fight to-day," remarked
+the young captain to Gilmore, who had now been appointed first
+lieutenant.
+
+"I reckon you are right," answered Gilmore. "The scouts haven't found
+any rebels within a mile."
+
+"It would almost seem as if we could march straight through to San
+Isidro," went on Ben, thoughtfully. "I must say I never heard of such
+a campaign."
+
+"They say General Lawton puts it down as a regular Indian campaign.
+But then the rebels don't do much fighting in the dark."
+
+"They are sick of it, Gilmore. I believe they would give up in a
+minute if the leaders were only assured that they would come out
+whole, as the saying goes."
+
+"Well, they've gone too far to come out whole, captain. General
+Aguinaldo may mean well, but he never went at this thing right. He
+ought to know that he isn't dealing with some third-rate power."
+
+On went the regiment, about four hundred and fifty strong now, for
+men were dropping out every day on account of fever and other tropical
+troubles. Ben had had a little fever himself, but had dosed himself
+with quinine before it had a chance to permeate his system and bring
+him down on his back.
+
+The advance led the regiment along a small stream lined with fading
+flowers and wild plantains and the ever present thorns and trailing
+vines. Birds were numerous, and here and there a sporting soldier
+could not resist the temptation to bring one of the feathered tribe
+down, to be cooked at the next resting place. Once the regiment
+stirred up a flock of wild turkeys, and a charge was made to capture
+the prizes, a charge that was as enthusing as one on the rebels.
+Soldiers are but human and must have their fun, no matter under what
+difficulties.
+
+"It's a fine turkey dinner we'll be afther havin' to-day," remarked
+Dan Casey, as he hung one of the birds over his shoulder. He had
+scarcely spoken, when pop-pop went several Mausers in a thicket
+beyond, the bullets singing their strange tune in the leaves over the
+advancers' heads.
+
+"Forward!" shouted Major Morris, who was in temporary command of the
+regiment, and away they went once more, to suddenly find themselves
+on spongy soil which speedily let them down to their ankles. In the
+meantime the insurgents' fire became thicker than ever, and it looked
+as if they were caught in an ambush.
+
+"Fire at will!" came the order. "To the left, boys, and make every
+shot tell!"
+
+A roar of musketry drowned out the words, and immediately Ben's
+company found itself all but surrounded. To go into this quagmire had
+certainly been a grave error, but all leaders make mistakes sometimes;
+and Major Morris was suffering as greatly as his men.
+
+The next half hour was one Ben never forgot. The rebels evidently
+thought they had the Americans at their mercy and pushed in closer and
+closer, until more than half of the contestants were fighting hand to
+hand. Many had exhausted their ammunition, and were using their
+bayonets or else handling their guns as clubs.
+
+"Die!" cried one tall Tagal, as he flashed up before Ben with a bloody
+bolo. "Die!" he repeated in bad English, and made a lunge at the young
+captain. But Gilmore had his eye on the man, and the lieutenant's
+sword cut the bolo from the rebel's grasp.
+
+"Good for you!" cried Ben. Then he drew a long breath, to think of the
+narrow escape he had had. The native, his hand flowing with blood,
+retreated as suddenly as he had approached.
+
+The tide of the battle was now taking Americans and insurgents toward
+a cane-brake. The rebels still fought desperately, but they were
+beginning to lose confidence, for the Americans were pushing them
+hard.
+
+But now came a cheer from the rear, and Company B rushed up to the aid
+of Ben's command. To the young captain's astonishment, Gilbert was in
+command, all the upper officers being either killed or wounded.
+
+"Gilbert!" he called, but had no time to say more. But the young
+Southerner heard and waved the sword he had picked up. Soon the two
+companies were fighting shoulder to shoulder, and the enemy were
+driven out into the cane-field, and then into a meadow. Here they
+tried to make a stand, around an old rice-house, and it took another
+half hour to dislodge them. But when they did retreat at last, they
+went in great haste, many leaving their weapons and outfits behind
+them.
+
+The fighting over, Ben started to find the major. Gilbert accompanied
+him. Their first hunt for the commander, however, was unsuccessful.
+
+"It's queer," was Ben's comment. "I trust he isn't dead in the
+bushes."
+
+The hunt gradually brought them to a trail through the jungle, and
+presently Gilbert heard a faint moan for help. Running in the
+direction, they found a soldier of Company C lying on some moss, his
+knee shattered from a Mauser bullet.
+
+"Oh, the pain!" groaned the poor fellow. "Help me, won't you?"
+
+"We'll do all we can for you," answered Ben, and while he went to
+work, Gilbert ran back to bring up the hospital corps with a
+stretcher.
+
+"You want to go after Major Morris," said the wounded soldier, as soon
+as he felt comfortable enough to talk.
+
+"We are looking for Major Morris," replied Ben, much astonished.
+"Where is he?"
+
+"He was knocked over by one of the Dagos, and then three of 'em
+carried him away."
+
+This was certainly news, and Ben waited impatiently for Gilbert to get
+back. As soon as the young Southerner returned, both asked the
+wounded soldier in what direction the captured major had been taken.
+
+"They went through the cane-brake," was the answer. "You'll find the
+trail easily enough, I think, if you look for it. One of the rebs wore
+boots with high heels, so you can't miss 'em."
+
+The wounded man did his best to point out the right direction, and was
+then taken back to the hospital tent. Without delay Ben called Ralph
+Sorrel and half a dozen others to his aid.
+
+"We must go after Major Morris, and at once," he said. "Are you ready
+to undertake the work? It may be a dangerous proceeding."
+
+"We're with yer, cap'n," answered Sorrel, and his sentiment was that
+of all of the others.
+
+The trail into the cane-brake was followed without much difficulty,
+and the party of eight advanced as rapidly as the nature of the ground
+permitted. The storm had cleared off the night before, and the sun
+shone down hotly, making the air in the brake suffocating.
+
+"This yere is a putty big cane-brake, an' no error," remarked Sorrel,
+after a quarter of a mile had been covered. "Cap'n, it won't do fer us
+to turn ourselves about an' git lost."
+
+"We'll stick to the one trail," answered Ben. "As yet I've seen no
+side trails, although I've been watching every foot of the ground that
+we crossed."
+
+"Nor I, cap'n,--an' don't wan't to, neither," added the tall
+mountaineer.
+
+A little further on was a clearing, in the centre of which stood a
+small cane-house. Halting on the edge of the opening, they beheld
+several Filipinos on guard outside the house. In the doorway, with his
+back to the opening, stood Major Morris, his hands bound behind him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+THE TORNADO IN THE CANE-BRAKE
+
+
+"I reckon we have got 'em tight, cap'n," came from Sorrel, as the
+party of Americans came to a halt and surveyed the scene before them.
+
+"It depends upon how many of them there are," answered Ben. "Sorrel,
+supposing you skirt the clearing and try to count noses."
+
+The Tennesseean was willing, and started off, taking Gilbert with him.
+He was gone probably ten minutes.
+
+"Not more than ten at the most," he reported. "And of that number two
+are wounded and have their arms in slings."
+
+"Any other prisoners besides Major Morris?"
+
+"Not that we could see," came from Gilbert. "We could rush them easily
+enough if it wasn't for the major," he added.
+
+"We don't want any harm to befall Major Morris," said Ben, thoughtfully.
+"If we-- The rebels have discovered us, look out!"
+
+Ben had scarcely finished when a report rang out and a bullet whizzed
+over their heads. One of the soldiers outside of the cane-house had
+seen two of the Americans and had fired upon them.
+
+The discharge of the firearm caused Major Morris to turn around, and
+as he did so Ben waved his cap at his commander, and was recognized.
+Then two of the insurgents hurried the major out of sight.
+
+The Americans were not slow to return the fire; and, although nobody
+was struck, the insurgents lost no time in disappearing from view. A
+lull followed, as both sides tried to determine what was best to be
+done next.
+
+"Here comes a flag of truce," said Gilbert, presently, as a rebel
+appeared, holding up a white rag. "If I were you, I wouldn't honor
+it."
+
+"I would like to hear what they have to say," replied Ben, quietly.
+
+"But remember how they fired on the other flag of truce," insisted the
+young Southerner. "You'll be running your head into a lion's mouth."
+
+"Sorrel, keep that man covered," said Ben. "I won't move out any
+further than he does."
+
+"If you go, I'll go with you," said Gilbert, promptly.
+
+He would not be put off, and together Ben and he moved into the
+opening, Ben holding up a new handkerchief as he walked. The rebel at
+once halted, as if expecting them to come over to where he stood.
+
+"You come over here!" cried Gilbert, and waved his hand.
+
+There was a full minute's delay, and then of a sudden the rebel threw
+down his white flag and sped toward the house. At the same time three
+reports rang out, and Gilbert fell back, struck in the shoulder.
+
+"What did I tell you!" he gasped. "They are treacherous to the last
+degree!" And then the young Southerner fainted.
+
+As just mentioned, three reports had rung out, but only two had come
+from the house. The third came from Ralph Sorrel's weapon, and the man
+who had carried the pretended flag of truce fell dead in his tracks.
+
+The dastardly attack angered Ben beyond endurance, and leaving Gilbert
+resting comfortably on some cut cane, he leaped to the front. "Come,
+boys, we will root them out!" he cried, and ran on toward the house as
+fast as he could, firing as he went. Sorrel was at his heels, and the
+others fired, each "red-hot" as they afterward expressed it.
+
+The insurgents saw them coming and fired several shots, but nobody was
+struck, and in a trice the house was surrounded. Then Major Morris
+came bounding through a window, and it was Ben who cut his bonds with
+a pocket-knife.
+
+"I saw it all," exclaimed the major. "Go for them, men, every one of
+the rascals deserves death!" And stooping over the dead rebel, he took
+from his bosom a bolo and joined in the attack. "They are a pack of
+cowards--a mere set of camp followers."
+
+The major was right; the rebels in the house were no regularly
+organized body, and at the first sign of real peril they fled by the
+back way, over a ditch and straight for the nearest jungle. But our
+friends were determined that they should not escape thus easily, and
+pursued them for nearly half a mile, killing one more and wounding
+three others. Long afterward they learned that those who had thus
+forfeited their lives were bandits from the mountains back of San
+Isidro. They had joined the forces under General Aguinaldo, merely for
+the booty to be picked up in the towns through which the rebel army
+passed.
+
+As soon as the contest had come to an end, Ben hurried back to where
+he had left Gilbert. The wound from which the young Southerner was
+suffering was painful, but not dangerous. Yet it was likely to put
+Gilbert in the hospital for the best part of a month.
+
+"It's too bad--I thought I could see the thing through to the end,"
+said Gilbert, shaking his head dolefully.
+
+"You'll have to take your dose as I did," answered Ben. "I am glad it
+is not serious. Our regiment couldn't afford to lose such a brave
+fellow as you."
+
+"Brave? Didn't I hang back until you proposed to go out alone, Ben? If
+anybody was brave, it was you," and then Gilbert turned his face away
+to conceal the pain that was coming on.
+
+The hospital corps was so busy that Gilbert could not be carried back
+of the firing line for some time. Feeling that there would be no more
+fighting that day, Ben decided to remain by his old chum, and
+requested Sorrel to do likewise, leaving the others to accompany Major
+Morris back to the command proper. In the meantime, a skirmish line
+was stretched to the north of the cane-brake, that the insurgents
+might not regain any of the lost territory.
+
+It was frightfully hot, but scarcely had Major Morris left with his
+party than a faint breeze sprang up which gradually increased to a
+fair-sized wind. Making Gilbert as comfortable as possible under some
+of the tallest of the cane, Ben and Sorrel sat down beside him to do
+what they could to help him forget his pain.
+
+The three had been sitting in the shade for the best part of half an
+hour, and Sorrel was sharpening his knife on the side leather of his
+shoe, when, glancing up, Ben noticed a peculiar cloud in the sky
+overhead.
+
+"That looks rather queer," he remarked. "Does that denote a
+wind-storm, Sorrel?"
+
+"It denotes something, that's sartin," responded the mountaineer,
+surveying the cloud with care. "It's something I ain't seed out yere
+yit," and he leaped to his feet.
+
+The cloud was about as large as a barrel in appearance, and of a deep
+black color. It seemed to be whirling around and around, and as it
+came forward began to expand. Then it shot off to the southward, but
+not out of sight.
+
+"I'm glad it's gone," said Gilbert, who had roused up to watch the
+strange thing. "I don't want to get caught in a western cyclone--and
+that cloud looks like those I have heard described."
+
+"The rainy season is coming on here, and I presume we are bound to
+have more or less tornadoes," answered Ben. "They say that last year
+they were something awful along the seacoast."
+
+The cloud was circling around the southern horizon, but now it turned
+once again and came slowly toward them. While it was yet quarter of a
+mile away, it shot down to earth and a strange humming sound reached
+their ears, followed by a whistling that caused each of them to
+shiver.
+
+"It's a whirlwind!" yelled Sorrel. "Come into yonder hollow, cap'n!"
+and he caught hold of Gilbert and lifted him up. The hollow he
+mentioned was less than fifty feet away, yet to reach it in time was
+almost impossible, so swiftly did the tornado approach them. The air
+became black as night and was filled with cane, grass, and branches of
+trees. It struck the house in the clearing, and with a single mighty
+crash the structure went up into the air, to fall with another crash a
+hundred yards beyond.
+
+Running with the tall Tennesseean, Ben pitched into the hollow just
+as the first of the tornado hurled itself at them. Down came the
+mountaineer, but taking good care that Gilbert should not be hurt by
+his quick leap. Then all fell flat, with their faces to earth.
+
+It was like some horrible nightmare to Ben,--the whistling wind and
+the strange humming, the blackness, and the whirling cane and tree
+limbs. In some places the ground was furrowed up as by a plough, and
+down on their heads came dirt and grass, and then a shower of stalks
+that buried them completely. And still the wind kept up, in a madder
+gallop than ever. Ben felt as if every moment was going to be his
+last.
+
+The time was an age; yet by the watch it was not yet five minutes when
+the tornado had departed, leaving its track of ruin behind. But still
+the party of three under the cane-stalks lay still, wondering if it
+was safe to get up.
+
+"Do yer calkerlate it's over, cap'n?" came from Sorrel, after a
+painful pause.
+
+"It appears to be, but there is no telling what such a thing will do
+next," answered the young captain, as he pressed on the stalks over
+him, and got up. "Gilbert, are you hurt?"
+
+"No," came with a gasp. "But, Ben, that was--was a terror, wasn't
+it?"
+
+"It was, Gilbert, and something I never want to witness again."
+
+By this time Sorrel was also on his feet and hauling Gilbert into
+daylight. The cloud was gone, and the sun shone as brightly as ever.
+But at a great distance they saw the tornado sweeping up into the
+mountains.
+
+"We are well out of it," was Ben's comment, as they watched the cloud
+until it was out of sight. "That played sad havoc here. I wonder what
+it will do in the mountains?"
+
+No one could answer that question, and no one tried. Ben would have
+been very much surprised had anybody told him that the same tornado
+which had visited him was also to visit his brother Larry. But so it
+proved, as we shall speedily see.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+THE FLIGHT FOR LIBERTY
+
+
+"Well, this is getting too monotonous for anything."
+
+It was Larry who spoke, and he sat on the stump of a tree at the mouth
+of a wide cave, gazing disconsolately at a fire which several
+insurgents were trying to build.
+
+The place was on the top of a high hill, backed up by still higher
+mountains. On every hand were sharp rocks and trees, with a tangle of
+thorns. Small wonder, then, that Aguinaldo and his cohorts considered
+these fastnesses inaccessible for American troops. No regular body
+could have gotten to such a place, and to forward supplies hither was
+totally out of the question.
+
+The rebels numbered fifteen, all mountaineers and strong. At General
+Luna's request they had brought ten prisoners to the spot, and the
+other prisoners were to come up some time later. Why the Filipinos
+thus divided the men they had taken is not definitely known, yet
+divided they were, until some escaped and others died or were given
+up.
+
+Since Larry had been captured he had passed through half a dozen
+different hands. It must be said he had been treated fairly well,
+better, perhaps, than many of my readers may suppose. To be sure, his
+clothing was in rags and his shoes were almost minus their soles, but
+in these respects he was no worse off than those who kept him captive.
+Then, too, the food given him was very plain, but the rebels ate the
+same, and to complain, therefore, would have been worse than useless.
+
+Larry had missed Barton Brownell, for the pair had been fairly
+friendly, as we know. With the transferal to new quarters the young
+sailor had struck up an acquaintanceship with Dan Leroy, one of the
+_Yorktown's_ men, also a prisoner. A number of the sailors from the
+_Yorktown_--in fact, a boatload, had been captured, but Leroy had
+become separated from his messmates at the very start.
+
+"Yes, it is monotonous, lad," said Leroy, who was resting at Larry's
+feet. "But, as I've said a hundred times afore, we can't help
+ourselves, consequently, make the best on it. Ain't that sound
+argyment, lad?"
+
+"I reckon so, Leroy, but--but--"
+
+"When ye git as old as I am you'll see things in a different light. We
+can't complain o' the treatment here, lad."
+
+"But I would like to know how the war is going, and if my brother
+knows I am alive."
+
+"Reckon the war is goin' agin the Tagals, or they wouldn't be
+a-pushing back into the mountains like this."
+
+"It's a wonder they don't try to exchange us."
+
+At this Dan Leroy smiled grimly. "Might be as how they consider us too
+vallyble," he suggested. He was a short, stout fellow, much given to
+joking, and rarely out of good humor.
+
+It was about the middle of the afternoon, and from a long distance
+came the sounds of firing. But the booming came from big field-pieces,
+so Larry knew it must be far away, and so it gave him small hope.
+
+The rebels had just brought in some fresh meat, procured from the town
+at the foot of the long hill, and they speedily proceeded to make a
+beef stew with rice and yams. The smell was appetizing, and as nobody
+had had a square meal that day, Larry brightened over the prospect.
+
+The cave in the hillside was irregular in shape, running back to a
+series of openings which nobody had ever yet explored. In this cave
+the insurgents kept some of their supplies, brought up from San
+Fernando, San Isidro, and other places. It was a fact that Aguinaldo
+hardly knew where to "jump" next.
+
+Before nightfall the dinner was ready, and the chief of the rebels had
+the prisoners supplied with bowls of the stew. "Eat all of eet," he
+said, with a grin. "For maybe no geet such t'ings to-morrow."
+
+"Thanks, we'll fill up then," responded Larry, and set to with a will,
+as did all the other prisoners.
+
+The captives were unarmed, and though the rebels watched them, they
+were allowed more or less of the freedom of the camp. Finishing his
+bowl of stew, Larry leaned over to where Leroy sat.
+
+"Leroy, if we can manage to get a kettle of that stew, I'll be for
+trying to get away to-night," he whispered.
+
+"And how are ye going to get it, lad?" asked the sailor.
+
+"Wait and you will see," was the answer, and Larry arose and sauntered
+over toward the fire.
+
+"I spilt some of the stew on the ground," he said, which was true,
+although the amount had not been large. "Can I have more?"
+
+"Yes, take what you will," returned the insurgent chief, who felt in
+good humor, through having obtained a leave of absence, to start on
+the morning following. "And give some to your friends. We'll fill up
+for once."
+
+"Thank you," answered Larry, and hurried to the other prisoners with
+the big pot from over the fire. The prisoners had a large tin kettle
+for water, fitted with a cover so that bugs might be kept out, and
+this he filled to the brim, and also gave the others all they wished.
+
+"Going to eat all of that?" queried one of the men, with a short
+laugh.
+
+"Sometime--not now," answered Larry. Then he took the pot back to the
+fire and carried his bowl and the kettle into the cave. At once Leroy
+followed him.
+
+"And now, what's this nonsense you're talkin' about running away?"
+demanded the _Yorktown_ sailor, as soon as they were alone.
+
+"I'm going to try my luck to-night, Leroy. If you don't want to go,
+you can stay with the others."
+
+"But how are you going? There's a guard around the foot of the hill,
+and they will shoot you on sight."
+
+"I'm not going to try the foot of the hill--at least, not this side of
+it."
+
+"Well, you can't get to the other, for that cliff over this cave is in
+the way."
+
+"I'm going to explore the caves back of this. They must lead to
+somewhere."
+
+The old sailor shook his head. "More'n likely they lead to the bowels
+of the earth. You'll fall into some pitfall, and that will be the end
+of you."
+
+"I'll light a torch as soon as I am out of sight of this place, and
+I'll be very careful where I step."
+
+"This cave may be as big as the Mammoth Cave of Kentucky. You'll get
+lost in one of the chambers and never find your way out."
+
+"I'll have to risk that. But I'm bound to try it--if they give me the
+chance."
+
+"You're foolish. Why, confound it, I've half of a mind to report the
+scheme."
+
+"Oh, Leroy, surely you won't do that."
+
+"I mean just to save you from yourself, Larry."
+
+"I don't intend to remain a prisoner until I am baldheaded, Leroy.
+I'm going to try to escape--and that's the end of it."
+
+"Will you take any of the others along?"
+
+"If they want to go."
+
+"There won't a soul go--and I know it," responded the stout sailor, in
+positive tones.
+
+When the other prisoners came in, he told them of Larry's plan. One
+and all of them agreed it was foolhardy.
+
+"I don't believe there is any opening," said one. "Or if there is,
+it's so high up in the mountains that you'll never reach it."
+
+"And what are you going to do for eating? That kettle of stew won't
+last forever," said another.
+
+So the talk ran on, but the more he was opposed, the more headstrong
+did Larry become--and that, as old readers know, was very much like
+him.
+
+"I shall go, and good-bye to all of you," he said, in conclusion. And
+then he shook hands with one after another, Leroy last of all. The
+_Yorktown's_ man was trembling.
+
+"I hate ter see ye do it, lad," he said. "It seems like going to
+death, but--but--hang it, I'll go along, so there!"
+
+"But you needn't if you don't wish to," protested the youth. "I am not
+afraid to go alone."
+
+"But I am a-going, and we'll sink or swim together, Larry. Who else
+goes?"
+
+Dan Leroy, looked from one face to the next. But not another prisoner
+spoke, for each had taken a short walk to the rear caves and seen
+quite enough of them. Then a guard came in, and the strange meeting
+broke up immediately.
+
+The prisoners lay down to rest, but not one of them could go to sleep.
+All of the others were waiting for Larry and Leroy's departure. At
+last, satisfied that all was right for the night, the guard went
+outside, to join several of his companions around the camp-fire.
+
+"Now, then," whispered Larry, and arose, to be followed immediately by
+Dan Leroy. The kettle secured, they hurried for the rear of the outer
+cave, without so much as looking at the others, who raised up to watch
+their shadowy disappearance.
+
+The flight for liberty had begun. Would it succeed or fail?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+THE CAVES UNDER THE MOUNTAIN
+
+
+For a distance of five hundred feet the way was known to both Larry
+and his sailor friend, and the pair passed along swiftly, guided in
+part by the flickering rays from the camp-fire outside of the main
+cave.
+
+"Have a care now, lad," whispered Leroy, as they reached a narrow
+passage, which turned first to the left and then upward. "The roof is
+low, and you don't want for to dash your brains out on the rocks."
+
+"Never fear but I'll be as careful as I can," responded the youth,
+feeling his way along. "Better keep close, Leroy, that we don't become
+separated."
+
+The turn made, it was no easy matter to ascend the sloping floor, with
+here and there a rough bowlder to cross, or a hollow in which one
+might fall and break a leg without half trying, as the _Yorktown_
+sailor said. Presently Leroy called a halt.
+
+"Better light the torch now, Larry."
+
+"I was going to save it," was the reply. "There is no telling how long
+we may have to depend upon it."
+
+"That is true; but it's no longer safe to walk in this pitchy
+darkness."
+
+Leroy was provided with matches, used in smoking his pipe, which had
+not been denied him, and striking one he set fire to an end of the dry
+cedar branch which Larry had laid away over a week before, when the
+thought of running away had first crossed his mind. At the start the
+branch spluttered wofully and threatened to go out, but by coaxing it
+remained lit, and presently burst into a flame that was sufficient to
+see by for a circle of twenty or thirty feet.
+
+On they plodded, up an incline that seemed to have no end, and then
+around another turn. Here the chamber widened out, and beyond there
+were branches, two to the left and one to the right.
+
+[Illustration: On they plodded, up an incline that seemed to have no
+end.--_Page 236._]
+
+"This is as far as I've ever been," said the boy. "The passages beyond
+seemed to lead downward for part of the way, and it's impossible to
+judge which is the best to take. But I was of a mind to try that one
+on the right."
+
+"Well, I reckon as how the right ought to be right," laughed Leroy.
+"If it ain't, all we can do is to come back to here an' try over
+again, eh?"
+
+"We haven't got time to waste in experimenting, Leroy. This is a
+serious business. We are liable now to be shot on sight."
+
+"An' nobody knows thet better nor Dan Leroy, your humble servant. An'
+if you say try one o' the other passages, I'm jes' as willin'."
+
+"No, we'll take that on the right," returned the youth, and started
+onward without further delay.
+
+The passage was a crooked one, not over ten feet wide in any one part,
+and but little over the height of a man. At one place a great rock
+blocked the way, and over this they went on their hands and knees.
+
+"Kind o' a tight squeeze," remarked Leroy. "If that rock war a bit
+bigger, we wouldn't be able to git over it at all."
+
+"Hark!" cried Larry, coming to a halt. "What is that, somebody
+calling?"
+
+They listened, and from a distance ahead made out a low murmur of some
+kind. "It's water running over the rocks," cried Leroy. "I hope it's
+a river leading to the outer world."
+
+"Oh, so do I!" ejaculated the boy, and both started onward eagerly.
+Long before the fall of water was gained they found themselves
+splashing in an underground stream up to their ankles. The waterfall
+was underground, coming from the rocks overhead and running into the
+stream, which, in turn, sank out of sight some distance further on.
+
+"Nothing in that," muttered Leroy, his face falling.
+
+Nevertheless, they stopped for a drink, for the tramp through the
+caves had made them thirsty. The old sailor held the torch, while
+Larry carried the kettle. It was well that the top of the kettle was
+on tight, otherwise the contents would have been spilled long before
+this.
+
+Beyond the waterfall the cave opened out once more in fan shape, the
+roof running upward to a high arch, from which hung stupendous
+stalactites of white and brown. Here the water dripped down in the
+form of a fine rain.
+
+"We're in a shower, lad, even though we are underground," remarked
+Leroy. "I must say I hope this don't last. If it does, we'll soon be
+wet to the skin." The vaulted cave soon came to an end, however, and
+now they found themselves in an opening cut up into a hundred
+different chambers, like a coal mine supported by arches. Each looked
+at the other in perplexity.
+
+"We can easily miss the way here," said Larry, soberly. "We had better
+lay out a course and stick to it."
+
+"Right you are, lad." Leroy pointed with his hand. "This seems as good
+a trail as any. Shall we follow it?"
+
+"Yes." And forward it was again. Presently they came to another
+chamber, and here the slope was again upward, much to their
+satisfaction. "If we keep on going upward, we are bound to get out at
+the top, sometime," was the way Larry calculated.
+
+Climbing now became difficult, and in a number of places each had to
+help the other along. Then came a wall twelve feet high, and here they
+were compelled to halt.
+
+"It looks as if we were blocked," remarked the _Yorktown_ sailor after
+an examination.
+
+"I'm not going to give up yet," answered the boy. "If we can't get up
+any other way, we can build a stairs with those loose stones we just
+passed."
+
+"Hurrah! you've solved the difficulty!" exclaimed the old sailor, and
+they set to work with a will. But rolling and lifting the stones into
+place was no mean job, and when at last they were able to pull
+themselves to the passageway above, both were utterly worn out and
+glad enough to sit down. The rest lasted longer than either had
+intended, for Leroy, who had not slept well the night before, dozed
+off, and Larry was not of a heart to wake him up. So the boy went to
+sleep too, and neither awakened until early morning.
+
+"Hullo! what's this?" cried Leroy, the first to open his eyes. All was
+so dark about him--Larry having extinguished the torch--that for the
+minute he could not collect his senses. Putting out his hand he
+touched the youth on the face, and Larry awoke instantly.
+
+They were both hungry, and lighting the torch again, warmed up the
+kettle of stew, and then ate about one-third of the stuff. "Touches
+the spot," cried Leroy, smacking his lips. He could have eaten much
+more, but knew it was best to be careful of their supply until the
+outer world was gained.
+
+Much refreshed by their sleep, but somewhat stiff from the dampness
+and the unaccustomed work of the evening before, they proceed on their
+way, still climbing upward and still in a darkness, that was only
+partly dispelled by the feeble glare of the torch, which was now
+growing alarmingly small.
+
+"The light won't last more than a couple o' hours," said Leroy.
+"Perhaps we had better split the stick in two." This was done, and
+thus the feeble light was reduced one-half.
+
+Would the caves never come to an end? Such was the question Larry
+asked himself over and over again. Was it possible that they were to
+journey so far only to find themselves trapped at last? The thought
+made him shiver, and he pushed on faster than ever.
+
+"Do you know what I think?" said Leroy, an hour later. "I think we are
+moving around in a circle?"
+
+"A circle?"
+
+"Ay, lad. Don't you notice how the passageway keeps turning to the
+right?"
+
+Larry had noticed it. "But we are going upward," he said.
+
+"True; but who knows but what we'll be going downward presently."
+
+Still they kept on, but now Larry's heart began to fail him. They had
+progressed so far, had made so many turns, that to get back would
+probably be impossible. The caves were so vast one might wander about
+in them forever--if one's food did not give out. Larry shivered again
+and clutched the precious kettle of stew tighter than ever. He was
+once more hungry, but resolved to wait until the pangs of hunger
+increased before reducing the stock of food.
+
+The passageway was now level for a considerable distance, with here
+and there a rock to be climbed over or a crack to cross. Both had just
+made a leap over an opening several feet wide when Leroy set up a
+shout.
+
+"What is it?" asked Larry, eagerly.
+
+"Put the torch behind ye, lad, an' look ahead. Perhaps my eyes deceive
+me," answered the old sailor.
+
+Larry did as requested, and gave a searching look up the passageway.
+No, there was no mistaking it--there was a faint glimmer of light
+coming from what appeared to be a bend. He, too, gave a shout, and
+both set off on a run.
+
+As they sped onward the light became brighter and brighter, until the
+torch was hardly needed. They were running side by side, each trying
+to gain the outer air first.
+
+"Look out!" suddenly yelled Leroy, and caught Larry by the arm. The
+old sailor could hardly stop, and had to throw himself flat, dragging
+the boy down on top of him.
+
+A few feet beyond was an opening twelve to fifteen feet wide, running
+from side to side of the passageway. The walls of the opening were
+perpendicular, and the hole was so deep that when a stone was dropped
+into it they could scarcely hear the thing strike bottom.
+
+"Here's a how-d'ye-do!" cried Leroy, gazing into the pit. "We can't
+jump across that, nohow!"
+
+"A real good jumper might," answered Larry. "But I shouldn't want to
+try it. The other side seems to slope down toward the hole. What's to
+be done?"
+
+Ah, that was the question. It looked as if their advance in that
+direction was cut off completely.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+BOXER THE SCOUT
+
+
+Much chagrined, man and boy stood on the brink of the chasm before
+them and gazed at the other side. It was sloping, as Larry had said,
+and wet, which was worse. A jump, even for a trained athlete, would
+have been perilous in the extreme.
+
+"Looks like we were stumped," remarked Leroy, laconically.
+
+"And just as we were so near to yonder opening!" cried Larry, vexed
+beyond endurance. "If we only had a plank, or something."
+
+He looked around, but nothing was at hand but the bare stone walls,
+with here and there a patch of dirt and a loose stone. He walked to
+one end of the hole.
+
+"A fellow might climb along yonder shelf if he were a cat," he said
+dismally. "But I don't believe a human being could do it."
+
+"No, and don't you go for to try it," put in the old sailor. "If you
+do, you'll break your neck, sure as guns is guns."
+
+"Well, we've got to do something, Leroy."
+
+"So we have; an' I move we sit down an' eat a bite o' the stew. Maybe
+eatin' will put some new ideas into our heads."
+
+"I'd rather wait until we gain the open air."
+
+"But we can't make it--yet--so be content, lad. It's something to know
+thet the blue sky is beyond."
+
+They sat down, and soon finished one-half of what remained of the mess
+in the kettle. Never had anything tasted sweeter, and it was only by
+the exercise of the greatest self-control that they kept back a
+portion of the food.
+
+"Perhaps we'll have to go back, remember that," said Leroy, as he put
+the cover on the kettle once more.
+
+"Go back? No, no, Leroy! I'll try jumping over first."
+
+"I don't think I shall. Thet hole-- What's that?"
+
+A sound had reached the old sailor's ears, coming from some distance
+ahead. It was the sound of footsteps approaching.
+
+"Somebody is coming!" whispered Larry, and crouched down. Then a man
+put in an appearance, coming from the opposite end of the passageway.
+He was an American soldier, hatless and almost in tatters.
+
+"Hullo there!" cried Larry, leaping up. "Oh, but I'm glad you came!"
+
+At the cry the soldier stopped short in amazement. Larry's words
+echoed and reëchoed throughout the passage. He looked toward the pair
+at the chasm, but could make out little saving the torch which Leroy
+was holding.
+
+"Who calls?" he asked at last.
+
+"I called," answered the boy. "Can't you see us? We are two lost
+sailors, and we can't get over this beastly hole. Come this way, but
+be careful of where you step."
+
+"You must be Americans by your voices. Am I right?"
+
+"Yes; and you are an American, too," said Larry, as the soldier came
+closer. Soon he stood facing them, with a look of wonder on his
+bronzed features.
+
+"How did you get here?" he demanded.
+
+"It's a long story," answered Leroy. "We escaped from some rebels at
+the other end of this cave, and we've been wandering around since
+last night. Are you alone, or are our forces outside of this hole?"
+
+"General Lawton's troops are a good many miles from here," answered
+the soldier. "I am one of his scouts, and I became separated from our
+command and got up here to escape being hunted down by the crowd of
+Filipinos that was after me. They are in the woods just outside of
+this hole."
+
+"Then you are all alone?" said Larry, his face falling a little.
+
+"Yes, although I think a couple of our men must be in this vicinity.
+We are pressing the rebels pretty hard, you know."
+
+The scout's name was George Boxer, and he was one of the best marksmen
+in Chief Young's command. He listened to their story with interest,
+and at once agreed to do what he could for them. They noted with
+satisfaction that he was provided with both a rifle and a pistol, and
+also a belt well filled with ammunition.
+
+It was an easy matter for Boxer to make his way into the open air and
+find a fallen tree limb of sufficient thickness to throw over the
+chasm as a make-shift bridge. As soon as the limb was secure, Larry
+and Leroy came over, and then the party of three made their way to the
+mouth of the cave.
+
+It was a welcome sight to see the sky again and the sunshine, and
+Larry's eyes sparkled as he gazed down the mountain-side and at the
+vast panorama spread out before him. At their feet was a heavy jungle,
+and beyond a plain and a small hill, where a large body of insurgents
+were encamping.
+
+"It's good to be in the fresh air again, eh, lad?" observed Leroy.
+"But I'm afraid we'll have a good bit o' trouble gettin' past them
+rebels," he added to George Boxer.
+
+"We can't get past them in the daytime," answered the scout; "but I
+think we can make it after the sun goes down. And it will take us till
+sundown to get to the bottom of this mountain, if I am not mistaken."
+
+Now they were in the open, it was decided to discard the kettle; and
+the three ate up what remained of the stew, along with the single
+ration which Boxer carried. Then they began the descent of the
+mountain-side, slipping over rocks and dirt as best they could, and
+finding their way around many an ugly pitfall.
+
+"I suppose you think it's queer I came up so far," said Boxer, as they
+hurried downward. "The truth is I was so closely pursued I didn't
+realize how far I was going. Those rebels can climb the mountains like
+so many wildcats. I'm afraid we'll never clean them out if they take a
+stand up here."
+
+It was hot, and now Leroy gazed from time to time at the sky. "A storm
+or something is coming," he said.
+
+"Yes, something is coming," added Boxer. "I can tell it by the way the
+birds are flying about. They seem to be troubled."
+
+"I see a cloud away off to the southward," put in Larry. "It's not
+large, but it's mighty black."
+
+No more was said just then upon the subject; and they continued their
+journey down the mountain-side until they came to a fair-sized stream,
+where they quenched their thirst and took a wash. They were about to
+go on again when Boxer held up his hand as a warning.
+
+"Great gophers, boys, we are running right into a nest of the
+rebels!" he whispered. "Back with you, before it is too late."
+
+They looked ahead and saw that the scout was right. They started to go
+back; and as they turned, a Mauser rang out and a bullet clipped the
+bushes beside them.
+
+"Discovered!" came from Leroy's lips. "Larry, I'm afraid the jig is
+up. Those Filipi--"
+
+Crack! It was Boxer's rifle that rang out, and as the scout was a
+sharpshooter, it may be taken for granted that he brought down his
+man. Then the three set off on a run along the side of the mountain to
+where a slight rise of ground promised better hiding.
+
+"We can't do much against such a crowd," said the scout. "But in a
+good spot we can hold out awhile, provided one of you can use my
+pistol."
+
+"I can fire tolerably straight," answered Leroy, and took the weapon.
+Soon the rise was gained, and they plunged in behind a tangle of
+pines. The Filipinos were following them, although taking good care
+not to expose themselves needlessly to the fire of such a crack
+marksman as Boxer had proved himself to be.
+
+From behind the tangle of growth, the three Americans watched the
+skilful advance of the enemy with dismay. "They are trying to surround
+us!" whispered Boxer. Then like a flash his rifle went up. The report
+was followed by a yell of pain, and a Filipino fell into view from
+behind a tree less than fifty yards distant. The poor fellow was hit
+in the side, but managed to crawl back into cover again, groaning
+dismally.
+
+Leroy also fired, a second later, aiming at a tall Tagal who was
+crossing a clearing to their left. If he hit his mark, the rebel gave
+no sign, but the man disappeared in a great hurry. Then came a
+crashing through the bushes below and to the left, proving that the
+Filipinos were massing in those directions.
+
+"Perhaps we had better try to crawl away from this--" began Larry,
+when a humming sound caught his ear. At the same time the sky grew
+black.
+
+"Look! look!" yelled Leroy. "What is this--the end of the world?"
+
+All looked up. The humming had increased to a whistle, and now came a
+crashing of trees and brush mingled with the wild cries of the
+Filipinos as they rushed away toward a near-by mountain stream. They
+knew what was coming, even if our friends did not.
+
+And then the tornado was almost upon them. I say almost, for, thanks
+to an all-ruling Providence, it did not strike them fairly, but rushed
+to one side, where the Filipinos had been gathering. The light of day
+seemed to die out utterly, and the air was filled with flying débris
+and screaming birds and wild animals made homeless on the instant. The
+very earth seemed to quake with the violence of the trees uprooted,
+and branches and dirt flew all over the Americans, until they were
+buried as completely as Ben and his companions had been. Larry thought
+it was indeed the end of the world, and breathed a silent prayer that
+God might watch over him and those he loved.
+
+At last the rushing wind ceased, and the crashing was lost in the
+distance. But the birds kept up their wild cries, and for several
+seconds neither Larry nor those with him moved, wondering if that was
+the end of the tornado, or if worse was to follow. But it was the end,
+and gradually they came forth one after another, to gaze on the mighty
+wreckage about them. It was Leroy who raised his hand solemnly to
+heaven.
+
+"I thank God that we have been spared," he said, and Larry and the
+scout uttered an amen.
+
+Whether or not to leave the vicinity was a question. At last, seeing
+no more of the enemy, they plucked up courage enough to move down the
+mountain-side once more. But the tornado had made the passage more
+difficult than ever, and several times they had to turn back.
+Nightfall found them still some distance from the plain, with yet
+another jungle to pass before the open would be gained.
+
+"We might as well make a night of it here," said Boxer, and footsore
+and weary Larry and Leroy agreed with him. It was not long before all
+dropped asleep, too tired to stand guard, and hardly deeming that one
+was necessary.
+
+The tornado had killed numerous birds and small animals, and it was
+easy to pick up a plentiful breakfast.
+
+"I don't know about making a fire," said Leroy. "Those rebels may spot
+us before we are aware."
+
+Yet they were too hungry to go without eating, and in the end they
+built a fire of the driest wood they could find, and while Boxer
+cooked the birds, Larry and the old sailor scattered the smoke with
+their jackets, so that it might not go up in a cloud, and also kept
+their eyes open for the possible appearance of the rebels. But the
+tornado had scared the insurgents as much as it had anybody, and not
+one showed himself.
+
+By eight o'clock they were once more on the way, Boxer leading with
+his gun ready for use, Larry in the centre, and Leroy bringing up the
+rear with the pistol.
+
+They were just entering the jungle at the foot of the mountain when a
+strange moaning reached their ears and all halted. There was a
+silence, and then the moaning started up again.
+
+"What is that?" questioned Larry. "It can't be a human being."
+
+"I think I know what it is," returned the scout. "Wait here till I
+make sure," and he glided ahead and was soon lost to sight under a
+clump of tall trees which grew in somewhat of a clearing. Soon they
+heard him shouting for them to come on.
+
+It was a water buffalo that was moaning. The beast had become caught
+under a partly fallen tree and could not release itself. It was a
+handsome animal and weighed a good many hundred pounds.
+
+"Here's meat and to spare!" cried Boxer, and drawing forth a hunting
+knife, he put the caribao out of his misery in short order. "This is
+some more work of that tornado," he went on, as he proceeded to cut
+out a choice steak. "We won't starve for the next forty-eight hours."
+
+"I hope by that time we'll have reached the army," answered Larry, and
+took the portion of meat handed to him. It was not a dainty thing to
+carry, but he had to shoulder it, since Boxer and Leroy were carrying
+the weapons.
+
+As they proceeded, the jungle appeared to become more dense, until it
+was next to impossible to make any progress. Yet they felt that each
+step was bringing them closer to the open plain and to a point where
+few natives were likely to be congregated. "If we once get down to the
+bottom, we'll be all right," said Boxer.
+
+But the scout had not reckoned on the fact that there was a hollow at
+the base of the mountain, and that the heavy rains had filled this
+full to overflowing. It was Larry who first called attention to the
+fact that the ground was growing damp. Then of a sudden the whole
+party stepped into the water up to their ankles.
+
+Here was a new dilemma to face, and each looked at the others in
+anything but a happy mood. "Beats everything what luck we're having!"
+cried Leroy, in deep disgust. "I'd give a year's pay to be safe on
+board the _Yorktown_ agin, keelhaul me if I wouldn't!"
+
+"I suppose the best thing we can do is to march around the swamp-hole,"
+replied Larry. "What do you say, Boxer?"
+
+"Let us try it a bit further," replied the scout, and they moved
+forward with care. At first the ground appeared to grow better, but
+then they went down again halfway to their knees and in a muck that
+stuck to them like glue.
+
+"It's no use, we'll have to go back," groaned Leroy, and turned about.
+Silently the others followed him, wondering where the adventure would
+end.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+THE DEPARTURE OF THE _OLYMPIA_
+
+
+The advances of both General MacArthur and General Lawton had been so
+far nothing but a series of successes, and so hard were the insurgents
+pressed, that they scarcely knew what to do next. Again they sued for
+peace, but as the Americans were not inclined to grant them anything
+until they had surrendered unconditionally, the war went on, but in
+more of a guerilla-fight fashion than ever.
+
+Near San Fernando the rebels continued to tear up the railroad tracks,
+and likewise attacked a train of supplies, killing and wounding
+several who were on board. They also attacked several gunboats coming
+up the San Fernando River, keeping themselves safely hidden, in the
+meantime, behind high embankments thrown up along the stream. While
+this was going on General Aguinaldo called a council of war, at San
+Isidro, at which fifty-six of his main followers were present. By a
+vote it was found that twenty were for peace, twenty for war, and
+sixteen wished to negotiate with the United States for better terms.
+This gathering gave rise to a rumor that the war would terminate
+inside of forty-eight hours. Alas! it was still to drag on for many
+months to come.
+
+The day after the tornado found Ben safe in camp again, with Gilbert
+in the hospital receiving every attention. It was Sunday, and a day of
+rest for the majority of the troops. At a small tent a short service
+was held, and Ben walked over, to hear a very good sermon on man's
+duty toward God under any and all circumstances. The sermon was
+followed by the singing of several hymns, and the soldiers remained at
+the spot for an hour or more afterward, talking over the general
+situation.
+
+"It always takes me back home to hear the preachin'," remarked Ralph
+Sorrel. "I'm mighty glad we have it. It shows we ain't no heathens,
+even though we air livin' a kind o' hit-an'-miss life a-followin' up
+these yere rebs."
+
+On Monday the scouts went out to the front, and a small brush was
+had with a number of the insurgents in the vicinity of San Miguel
+de Mayumo. They reported that the Filipinos had a number of
+intrenchments placed across the roads, but seemed to be retreating
+toward San Isidro.
+
+"If Aguinaldo makes a stand anywhere, it will be at San Isidro," said
+Ben to Major Morris, as the two discussed the situation. "Oh, but I do
+wish we could have one big battle and finish this campaign!"
+
+"How about the big battle going against us?" demanded the major, but
+with a twinkle in his eye.
+
+"It would never go against us," answered the young captain, promptly,
+"and the insurgents know it. That is why they keep their distance."
+
+The scouts had brought in a dozen or more prisoners, and among them
+were a Filipino and a Spaniard, both of whom could speak English quite
+fluently. As soon as he could obtain permission, Ben hurried over to
+have a talk with the prisoners.
+
+He found that the Filipino had belonged to those having some of the
+American prisoners in charge.
+
+"And do you know anything of my brother?" he asked eagerly. "He is a
+young sailor from the _Olympia_, and his name is Larry Russell."
+
+"Yes, yes, I know him," answered the Filipino, nodding his head. "He
+was at the cave where they have kept some of the prisoners for a long
+time." And he described Larry so minutely that Ben felt there could
+be no mistake about the matter.
+
+"Is my brother well? How do they treat him? Please tell me the
+truth."
+
+"You may not believe it, but we treat our prisoners good," said the
+Filipino. "And when I saw your brother last he was very well."
+
+"And where is this prison cave?"
+
+At this the insurgent shrugged his shoulder. "Now, _capitan_, you are
+asking me too much. I am pleased to tell you that your brother is
+safe. More than that I cannot tell, for it would not be right."
+
+This was not encouraging, yet Ben could not help but admire the
+prisoner's loyalty to his cause. "Very well," he said. "I am thankful
+to know that my brother is well. I was afraid that prison life might
+make him sick."
+
+A little later the young captain got the chance to talk to the Spanish
+prisoner, who was making an application for his release, claiming that
+he was friendly to the United States and had never encouraged the
+rebels. Seldom had the young captain met more of a gentleman than
+Señor Romano proved to be.
+
+"Ah, the war is terrible! terrible!" said the señor, after Ben had
+introduced himself. "It is bloodshed, bloodshed, all the time. Where
+it will end, Heaven alone knows--but I am afraid the Filipinos will be
+beaten far worse than was my own country."
+
+"I think you are right there," replied Ben. "But we can't do anything
+for them now until they lay down their arms."
+
+"The war has ruined hundreds of planters and merchants,--whole
+fortunes have been swept away,--and the insurgents have levied taxes
+which are beyond endurance. To some, Aguinaldo is their idol, but to
+me he is a base schemer who wants everything, and only for his own
+glory. But he cannot hold out much longer,--you are pressing him into
+the very mountains,--and once away from the civilization of the towns,
+his followers will become nothing but _banditti_--mark me if it is not
+so."
+
+"You are a resident of Luzon?" went on Ben.
+
+"Hardly. I belong in Spain--but I have lived here for several years."
+
+"Do you know one Benedicto Lupez, or his brother José."
+
+At this question the brow of Señor Romano darkened.
+
+"Do I know them? Ah, yes, I know them only too well. They are rascals,
+villains, cheats of the worst order. I trust they are not your
+friends."
+
+"Hardly, although I should like first-rate to meet them, and
+especially to meet Benedicto."
+
+"And for what? Excuse my curiosity, but what can an American captain
+and gentleman like you have in common with Benedicto Lupez?"
+
+"I want to get hold of some bank money that he carried off," answered
+the young captain, and told the story of the missing funds and the
+part the Spaniard was supposed to have played in their disappearance.
+
+"It is like Lupez," answered Señor Romano. "He is wanted in Cuba for
+having swindled a rich aunt out of a small fortune; and in Manila you
+will find a hundred people who will tell you that both brothers are
+rascals to the last degree, although, so far, they have kept out of
+the clutches of the law--through bribery, I think."
+
+"Not during General Otis's term of office?"
+
+"No; before the city fell into your hands. The government was very
+corrupt and winked at Lupez's doings so long as he divided with
+certain officials."
+
+"And what did he work at?"
+
+"Land schemes and loan companies. He once got me interested in a land
+scheme, and his rascality cost me many dollars, and I came pretty near
+to going to prison in the bargain." Señor Romano paused a moment. "If
+your troops take San Isidro, you will have a good chance to catch both
+of the brothers."
+
+"What! do you mean to say they are at San Isidro?" exclaimed the young
+captain.
+
+"They are, or, at least, they were two or three days ago. How long
+they will stay there, I cannot say. They were at the council of war
+held by Aguinaldo's followers."
+
+"I see." Ben mused for a moment. "Of course you do not know if they
+had the stolen money with them?"
+
+"They appeared to have some money, for both were offered positions in
+the army, and that would not have happened had not they had funds to
+buy the offices with. They appeared to be very thick with a general
+named Porlar,--a tricky fellow of French-Malay blood. I believe the
+three had some scheme they wished to put through."
+
+"Well, I'd like to catch the pair. I wonder if Aguinaldo would keep
+them around him, if he knew their real characters?"
+
+At this Señor Romano laughed outright. "You do not know how bad are
+some of the men around the arch rebel, _capitan_. He has some bad
+advisers, I can tell you that. To some of the worst of the crowd,
+Aguinaldo is but a figurehead."
+
+The pair discussed the matter for half an hour; and during that time
+Ben became convinced that Señor Romano had small sympathy for the
+insurgents, and was certainly not of their number.
+
+"I will do what I can for you, señor," he said, on parting. "I do not
+believe you will be kept a prisoner long." And the young captain was
+right on this score; the Spanish gentleman was released inside of
+forty-eight hours, and journeyed to Manila in company with a
+detachment bound for the capital of Luzon.
+
+The two talks made Ben do a good deal of sober thinking. He now knew
+to a certainty that Larry was alive and well, and he knew also that
+Benedicto Lupez was at or near San Isidro, and more than likely had
+the stolen money on his person. "I wish we could push ahead without
+delay," he muttered. "I might make a splendid strike all around. I
+know Larry is just aching to be at liberty once more."
+
+But supplies were again slow in coming to the front, and General
+Lawton did not feel like risking his men when the Filipinos might
+surrender at any moment. So a delay of several days occurred, with
+only a little skirmish here and there to break the monotony.
+
+"Hullo, here's news!" cried Major Morris, as he rushed up to Ben's
+quarters one morning. "Dewey is going to sail for the United States."
+
+"With the _Olympia_?" queried the young captain.
+
+"Yes. The warship leaves next Saturday, with all on board. Won't he
+get a rousing reception when he arrives home?"
+
+"Larry won't be with him," said Ben.
+
+"By Jove, captain, that's so. It's too bad, isn't it? I suppose he
+would like to go, too."
+
+"I can't say as to that. Perhaps he would just as lief stay here and
+join some command on land, or some other ship, especially if he knew
+that my brother Walter was coming on. But I am sure he would like to
+see his old messmates off," concluded Ben.
+
+Admiral Dewey started for the United States at four o'clock in the
+afternoon of Saturday, May 20. The departure proved a gala time, the
+harbor and shipping being decorated, and the other warships firing a
+salute. The bands played "Auld Lang Syne," "Home, Sweet Home," and
+"America," and the jackies crowded the tops to get a last look at the
+noble flagship as she slipped down the bay toward the China Sea, with
+the admiral standing on the bridge, hat in hand, and waving them a
+final adieu. In all the time he had been at Manila, Admiral Dewey had
+served his country well, and his home-coming was indeed to be one of
+grand triumph.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+THE ADVANCE UPON SAN ISIDRO
+
+
+"Why, Luke Striker, is it possible! I thought you had sailed for the
+United States on the _Olympia_."
+
+"Well, ye hadn't no right to think that, captain," responded the old
+gunner, as he shook hands warmly. "It might be that the others could
+go away and leave Larry behind, but he's too much my boy for me to do
+that--yes, sirree. When I hears as we were to set sail for the States,
+I goes up to the admiral himself, an' says I: 'Admiral,' says I, 'do
+you remember how Larry Russell an' yer humble servant comes on board
+of the _Olympia_?' says I. 'Yes,' says he. 'I remember it well,' says
+he. 'Well,' says I, 'Larry is ashore, a prisoner of the enemy,' says
+I. 'I don't want to go for to leave him, nohow. Can't you leave me
+behind,' says I. And he laughs and asks me all about Larry, and
+finally says I can go ashore and report to Rear Admiral Watson--who
+is comin' on--sometime later. And here I am, come to the front, to
+find Larry, ef sech a thing is possible."
+
+The old sailor's honest speech went straight to Ben's heart, and he
+saw very plainly how deep was Luke's affection for his younger
+brother. "You're a messmate worth having, Luke!" he exclaimed. "I
+don't wonder Larry thought so much of you."
+
+"Avast, I'm only a common sea-dog at the best, captain,--an ef I
+remained behind to cast around fer the lad, ye mustn't think thet Jack
+Biddle an' the others have forgotten Larry, fer they ain't, not by a
+jugful. Every man jack o' them is his friend, an' was, almost from the
+start."
+
+Luke had come up to the camp by way of Malolos, accompanying a
+pack-train of caribao carts carrying rations and army equipments. He
+had left the _Olympia_ several days before, and had not waited to
+witness the departure of the flagship.
+
+As Luke wished to remain with Ben, the latter lost no time in
+presenting the matter to Colonel Darcy and to Major Morris, and Luke
+was taken into the regiment camp as a cook, for he had once been a
+cook on a merchantman, years before. The position was largely an
+honorary one, and the sailor was permitted to leave his pots and
+kettles whenever he pleased.
+
+"It's good news," he said, when the young captain had told him what
+the prisoners had said about Larry and Benedicto Lupez. "I've an idee
+we'll get to Larry soon, an' down thet tarnal Spaniard in the
+bargain."
+
+The conversation took place on Tuesday. On Wednesday orders came to
+strike camp, and the march of the regiment was taken toward San Isidro
+by way of Baluarte, a small village seven miles to the southeast of
+the new rebel capital. In the meantime, although the Americans were
+not aware of it, Aguinaldo was preparing to decamp, with his so-called
+congress, into the mountain fastnesses, still further northward.
+
+"We are in for another fight," said Major Morris, as he came to Ben
+that afternoon. "And I've an idea it is going to be something to the
+finish."
+
+"That means, then, that we are bound for San Isidro!" cried the young
+captain. "Hurrah! that's the best news I've heard in a week."
+
+The regiment was soon on the road, spread out in proper battalion
+form. The day was close, and it looked as if a thunderstorm was at
+hand. The growth along the road was thick, and at certain points the
+overhanging branches had to be cut off that the troops might pass. The
+trail was bad, and often a gun, or wagon, had to stop so that a hole
+might be bridged over with bamboo poles. Here and there they passed a
+nipa hut, but these places were deserted, excepting in rare instances,
+where an aged native would stand at the door, holding up a white rag
+as a signal of surrender, or to show that he was an _amigo_, or
+friend.
+
+"It's pitiable," said Ben to Major Morris, as they trudged along side
+by side. "I reckon some of these ignorant creatures have an idea that
+we have come to annihilate them."
+
+"You can be sure that Aguinaldo and his followers have taught them
+something like that," replied the major. "Otherwise, they wouldn't
+look so terrified."
+
+At one point in the road, they came to a tumble-down hut, at the
+doorway of which rested a woman and her three small children, all
+watching the soldiers with eyes full of terror. Going up to the
+woman, Ben spoke kindly to her, but she immediately fled into the
+dilapidated structure, dragging her trio of offspring after her.
+
+"You can't make friends that way," cried Major Morris. "They won't
+trust you. I've tried it more than once."
+
+There was now a hill to climb, thick with tropical trees and brush.
+The regiment had scarcely covered a hundred feet of the ascent, when
+there came a volley of shots from a ridge beyond, which wounded two
+soldiers in the front rank.
+
+"The rebels are in sight!" was the cry. "Come on, boys, let us drive
+'em back! On to San Isidro!" And away went one battalion after
+another, fatigued by a two miles' tramp, but eager to engage once more
+in the fray. It was found that the insurgents had the ridge well
+fortified, and General Lawton at once spread out his troops in a
+semicircle, in the hope of surrounding the ridge and cutting off the
+defenders from the main body of Aguinaldo's army.
+
+Ben's regiment was coming, "head on," for the top of the ridge. The
+way was over ground much broken by tree-stumps, rocks, and entangling
+vines, that brought many a soldier flat.
+
+"Sure, an' it's a rigular fish-net!" spluttered Dan Casey, as he tried
+in vain to rise, with vines ensnaring both arms and legs. "I don't
+know but phwat a fellow wants a wire-cutter here, just as they had 'em
+in Cuby to cut the wire finces wid."
+
+"Nefer mind, so long as we got by der dop of dot hill," answered Carl
+Stummer, as he hauled his mate out of the entanglement. "Be dankful
+dot you ain't parefooted by dem dorns." And on went both once more.
+There was many a slip and a tumble, but very little grumbling.
+
+"Down!" The cry came from the front, and down went Ben's company into
+a little hollow, for the rebels had them in plain view now, and the
+two lines were less than three hundred yards apart. A volley from the
+insurgents followed, but nobody was struck.
+
+"Forward twenty-five yards!" cried Ben, and up went the company for
+another dash. It was a soul-trying moment, and none felt it more than
+the young commander, who ran on ahead to inspire his men. He knew that
+at any instant a bullet might hit him to lay him low forever. But his
+"baptism of fire" had been complete, and he did not flinch.
+
+"Hot work, this!" The words came from Gilmore as he came up the hill
+close to Ben. "It's going to be no picnic taking that ridge."
+
+"True, Gilmore; but it's got to be done," answered the young
+commander. "Down!" he shouted, and again the company fell flat. Then
+began a firing at will, which lasted the best part of ten minutes. The
+insurgents, likewise, fired, and a corporal and a private were wounded
+and had to be carried to the rear.
+
+Looking around, Ben espied Luke Striker in the ranks of Company D. The
+old sailor had provided himself with a rifle and an ammunition belt,
+and was popping away at a lively rate.
+
+"I couldn't help it," said Luke, when the young captain came up to
+him. "It's the best fun I've had sence thet air muss in Manila Bay,
+when we blowed old Montojo out o' the water, off Cavite. Say, but
+we'll git to the top o' the hill afore long, jes' see ef we don't!"
+And Luke blazed away again, and so Ben left him.
+
+The rest of the battalion was now closing in, and soon another
+advance was made, until the first line of the American troops was
+less than a hundred and fifty yards away from the insurgents' outer
+intrenchments. Then a yell came from a jungle on the left.
+
+"What's that? more rebels?" cried Ben, and listened.
+
+"No, no, the Filipinos are retreating!" came from a score of throats.
+"See, they are scattering like sheep! Up the hill, fellows; the fight
+is ours!" And a regular stampede occurred, each command trying to get
+to the top of the ridge first. The rebels were indeed retreating into
+a thicket behind the ridge. They went less than half a mile, however,
+and then made another stand, this time on the upper side of a mountain
+stream,--the very stream at which Larry and his companions had stopped
+after the escape from the caves under the mountain.
+
+To ford the stream would have been an easy matter under ordinary
+circumstances, but with the rebels guarding the upper bank, it was
+extremely hazardous, and the regiment came to a halt on the edge of
+the brush overhanging the water.
+
+"They are straight ahead, boys," said Major Morris, after his scouts
+had reported to him. "We will make a detour to the right. Forward, and
+on the double-quick!"
+
+Every soldier felt that delay would mean a serious loss, and a rapid
+rush was made through the jungle to a point where the stream became
+rocky and winding. Here an excellent ford was found, and they went
+over in column of fours. They could now enfilade the rebels' position,
+and this they did so disastrously that the Filipinos speedily threw
+down a large part of their arms and fled helter-skelter into the
+mountain fastnesses still further to the northward.
+
+The battle over, the battalion came to rest under the shade of the
+trees lining the stream, many of the soldiers throwing themselves down
+in a state bordering upon exhaustion, for the humidity in the air told
+upon them greatly. There was not a breath of a breeze, and the water
+hardly quenched the thirst that raged within them. As Major Morris
+declared, 'It was the primest place to catch a fever in' he had ever
+seen.
+
+Ben was sitting at the foot of a tall tree talking to Gilmore, when he
+saw the advance guards bringing in two Americans, one evidently a
+sailor. At once he sprang to meet the sailor, thinking the man might
+know something about Larry.
+
+The two men proved to be Dan Leroy and Boxer, the scout, and when he
+mentioned his brother's name to them, both were of course astonished.
+
+"Do we know him!" cried Leroy. "Sure and didn't he and I run away
+together from the rebels, and Boxer, here, helping us to get out of
+the prison caves. Yes, yes, I know Larry well." And then Leroy told of
+the escape from the caves, and of how all three of the party had
+become lost in the swamp lands.
+
+"We were in the swamps two days, and thought we would never get out,"
+he continued. "Luckily, we had some caribao meat with us; otherwise we
+should have starved to death. The swamps were full of mosquitoes and
+lizards and lots of other things, and we were almost eaten up alive,
+eh, Boxer?"
+
+"So we were," replied the scout.
+
+"But what of my brother?" asked Ben, impatiently.
+
+At this the faces of both of the men fell.
+
+"We can't say what became o' him," said the sailor from the
+_Yorktown_. "You see, after we got out of the swamp, we determined to
+stick to the high ground until we found a regular trail leading to
+the south. Well, our walk took us up to a high cliff overlooking a
+gorge filled with trees and bushes. We were walking ahead, with Larry
+at our heels, as we thought, when Boxer chanced to look around, and
+the boy was gone."
+
+"Gone!" gasped Ben, in horror.
+
+"Yes, gone! We couldn't understand it, and called to him, but he
+didn't answer. Then we went back about quarter of a mile, past the
+spot where we had seen him last, and fired the pistol as a signal. But
+he had disappeared totally, and we couldn't find hide nor hair o' him,
+try our level best."
+
+The confession was a sickening one, and for several minutes Ben could
+not trust himself to speak.
+
+"And--and what do you think became of my brother?" he asked, at
+length.
+
+Both men shrugged their shoulders. "I'm afraid he fell over the
+cliff," said Boxer. "You see, the footpath was narrow and mighty
+slippery in spots."
+
+At once Ben's mind went back to that scene in far-away Cuba, when
+Gerald Holgait had fallen over a cliff. Had a similar fate overtaken
+his brother? and if so, was he still alive or had he been dashed to
+his death?
+
+"How far is that spot from here?" he demanded abruptly.
+
+"Not over a mile, cap'n," answered Boxer.
+
+"I see you are a scout. Can you take me to the place?"
+
+"Certainly--but--but--it's mighty risky, cap'n--so many rebs lurking
+about."
+
+"Never mind--I must find Larry, alive or dead. Take me to him, and
+I'll pay you well for your services."
+
+"I ain't asking a cent, cap'n--that ain't my style."
+
+"Then you will take me?"
+
+"I will," said Boxer, promptly. "Only I'll have to report first and
+get official permission."
+
+"Major Morris will arrange that for you, I feel certain," answered
+Ben, turning to the major, who sat near, drinking in the conversation.
+
+"Yes, I'll arrange that," said the major. "But I don't see how I am
+going to do without you, captain."
+
+"Would you keep me from looking for my brother?"
+
+"No, no, go ahead, and Gilmore can take the company."
+
+So it was arranged; and inside of quarter of an hour Ben and Boxer
+were ready to depart.
+
+"Captain, can't I go with ye?" It was Luke Striker who asked the
+question. The anxious look on his face spoke more eloquently than
+words, and Ben consented without argument.
+
+And so the three set off on the search for Larry, little dreaming of
+the strange happenings in store for them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+LARRY IS SENTENCED TO BE SHOT
+
+
+To go back to Larry, at the time mentioned by Dan Leroy, when the boy
+had been following the old sailor and the scout along the cliff
+overlooking the valley in which both the Filipino and the American
+troops were encamped.
+
+The adventures in the swamp had been exceedingly tiring, and the youth
+could scarcely drag one foot after the other, as the party of three
+hurried along over rocks and through thickets which at certain points
+seemed almost impassible.
+
+"O dear! I'll be glad when this day's tramp comes to an end," he
+thought. "I wonder how far the American camp is from here?"
+
+He tried to look across the valley, but there was a bluish vapor
+hanging over trees and brush which shut off a larger portion of the
+view. The party had been walking over a trail which now brought them
+directly to the edge of the cliff. Here the footpath was scarcely two
+feet wide, and was backed up by high rocks and thorn bushes, around
+which it was difficult to climb without injury.
+
+The men were as tired as the boy, and it must be confessed that for a
+half hour or more they paid little attention to Larry. Gradually the
+youth lagged behind, until those ahead were lost to view around a
+sharp turn of the cliff.
+
+And it was then that an accident happened which put Larry in great
+peril all in an instant. In trying to make the turn, the boy got hold
+of a slender tree by which to support himself. Leroy and Boxer had
+grasped the same tree, and their swinging around had loosened its
+frail hold on the rocks, and as Larry grasped it, down went the
+sapling over the edge of the cliff, carrying the youth with it.
+
+[Illustration: Down went the sapling over the edge of the cliff.--_Page
+281._]
+
+The boy had no time to cry out, and he clung fast, not knowing what
+else to do, until the tree landed with a mighty crash on the top of
+another tree at the foot of the cliff. The sudden stoppage caused
+Larry to loose his hold, and he bumped from limb to limb in the tree
+below until he struck the ground with a dull thud; and then for the
+time being he knew no more.
+
+When the boy came to his senses, he found it was night and pitch dark
+under the thick tree, through the branches of which he had fallen. He
+rested on a bed of soft moss, and this cushionlike substance had most
+likely saved him from fatal injury.
+
+His first feeling was one of bewilderment, his next that his left foot
+felt as if it was on fire, with a shooting pain that ran well up to
+his knee. Catching hold of the foot, he felt that the ankle was much
+swollen, and that his shoe-top was ready to burst with the pressure.
+Scarcely realizing what he was doing, he loosened the shoe, at which
+part of the pain left him.
+
+"I suppose I ought to be thankful that I wasn't killed," he thought,
+rather dismally. "I wonder where Leroy and that scout are? I don't
+suppose it will do any good to call for them. The top of that cliff
+must be a hundred feet from here."
+
+The fall had almost finished what was left of Larry's already ragged
+suit, and he found himself scratched in a dozen places, with a bad cut
+over one eye and several splinters in his left hand. Feeling in his
+pocket, he found several matches which Leroy had given him on leaving
+the prison cave, and he lit one of these and set fire to a few dried
+leaves which happened to be ready to hand.
+
+The light afforded a little consolation, and by its rays the boy made
+out a pool of water not far off, and to this he dragged himself, to
+get a drink and then bathe the ankle. This member of his body had been
+so badly wrenched that standing upon it was out of the question, as he
+speedily discovered by a trial which made him scream with pain.
+
+"I'm in for it now," he thought. "With such an ankle as this, I can't
+go on, and what am I to do here, alone in the woods and with
+absolutely nothing to eat? I'd be better off in a Filipino prison."
+
+Slowly the night wore along, until a faint light in the east announced
+the coming of day. During the darkness the jungle had been almost
+silent, but now the birds began to tune up, and here and there Larry
+heard the movements of small animals, although none of the latter
+showed themselves.
+
+It was more pleasant under the big tree than down by the pool, and
+as daylight came on, Larry dragged himself back to his first
+resting-place. As he came up to the tree he saw a broken branch
+resting there and on it a bird's nest containing half a dozen speckled
+eggs.
+
+"Here's a little luck, anyway," he murmured, and taking some of the
+tree limbs, he made a fire and cooked the eggs in the hot ashes. When
+they were done, he broke off the shells and ate the eggs, and although
+the flavor was by no means to be prized, yet they did much toward
+relieving the hunger he had felt before taking the fall over the
+cliff.
+
+The day that followed was one which Larry says he will never forget,
+and for good reason. Neither human being nor beast came near him, and
+even the birds flying overhead seemed to give him a wide berth. Time
+and again he cried out, but the only answer that came back was the
+echo from the cliff, repeating his own words as if in mockery.
+Occasionally he heard firing at a great distance, but toward nightfall
+even this died out. He could scarcely move from his resting-place, and
+it was not until darkness came on that the pain in his ankle subsided
+sufficiently to allow of his sleeping in comfort.
+
+The long sleep did the boy a world of good, and when he awakened he
+found the swelling in his ankle gone down, along with much of the
+pain, and on getting up he found that he could walk, but it must be
+slowly and with care. He was again hungry, and his first effort was
+to supply himself with something to eat.
+
+To bring down even a small animal was out of the question, but he
+thought he might possibly knock over a bird or two, and with this in
+view cut himself several short, heavy sticks. The birds were coming
+down to the pool to drink, and watching his chance he let fly with the
+sticks and managed to bring down two of the creatures, and these
+formed the sum total of his breakfast, although he could have eaten
+twice as many. There were a number of berries to hand, but these he
+refrained from touching, fearing they might be poisonous.
+
+Larry felt he must now go on. To gain the top of the cliff was out of
+the question, so he decided to strike out directly for the southwest,
+feeling that this must sooner or later bring him into the American
+lines. To be sure, he had first to pass the Filipinos, but this could
+not be helped, and he felt that the best he could do would be to keep
+his eyes and ears open and walk around any body of the enemy that he
+might discover, instead of trying to steal his way straight through.
+This would require many miles of walking, and on the sore foot, too,
+but this hardship would have to be endured.
+
+Half a mile was covered in a slow and painful fashion, when Larry
+reached a small clearing, and here he sat down to rest on a fallen
+tree and to examine the ankle, which he was afraid was again swelling.
+He was engaged in looking at the wounded member, when a rough Tagalog
+voice broke upon his ears.
+
+"What do you here?" demanded a heavy-set native, in his own tongue, as
+he strode forward, gun in hand, followed by several others.
+
+Larry was startled and leaped up. In a twinkling he found himself
+surrounded, and several Mausers were levelled at his head.
+
+To resist would have been the height of foolishness, and Larry did not
+try. The Tagals asked him a number of questions in their own tongue,
+but he shook his head to show them that he did not understand. On
+their part, not one could speak English, so neither party could
+communicate with the other.
+
+The natives, however, soon understood that he was alone, and when he
+pointed to his ankle and limped, also understood that he had sprained
+that member. One went into the bushes, and presently returned with
+some leaves, which he crushed and packed inside of the boy's stocking.
+The juice of the leaves proved very cooling, and presently much of
+the pain from the sprain went away.
+
+The Tagals were bound for the cliff, but by a route different from
+that which Larry had travelled. As the boy was unarmed and could
+scarcely hobble along, they did not take the trouble to bind him in
+any way. He was made to march with half of the crowd before him and
+the others behind; and thus they proceeded until the cliff was
+reached, at a point where the jungle hid a series of rough steps
+leading to the top. Beyond the top of these steps was a mountain
+trail, which by nightfall brought them to a plateau where were
+encamped at least three hundred Filipinos of all classes, the Tagals
+predominating.
+
+A shout went up as Larry appeared, and he was at once recognized as
+one of the prisoners who had escaped from the caves, which were fully
+four miles away.
+
+"So they have caught you again?" remarked an under-officer, as he
+strode up with a sinister smile on his swarthy countenance. "You did
+not get very far."
+
+"No, I had a bad fall and lamed my foot," replied Larry, as cheerfully
+as he could. He was never one to "cry over spilt milk."
+
+"A fall? Where?"
+
+"I fell over the high cliff just below here."
+
+"And you live to tell it? Impossible!"
+
+"No, it is true. I fell into a large tree, and that broke my fall. But
+I was badly scratched up, and my ankle was sprained."
+
+"A rare fall truly, boy. It would have been better, though, if you had
+been killed."
+
+"Thank you; I like that!"
+
+"I say it because you are a prisoner who has tried to escape from us.
+Do you know the fate of all such?"
+
+At these words Larry could not help but shiver. He knew what the
+officer up at the cave prison had said,--that any prisoner trying to
+escape would be shot at the first opportunity which presented itself.
+
+"Surely, you would not kill me for trying to get away?" he cried
+quickly.
+
+The under-officer shrugged his shoulders. "It is not for me to change
+our regulations of war, boy. Your words prove that you knew beforehand
+the risk you were running."
+
+"Yes, yes--but-- You would try to get away too, if our soldiers caught
+you."
+
+"Possibly--I understand you treat your prisoners very badly."
+
+"Our prisoners are treated as well as yours. And we would not kill a
+Filipino for having tried to escape,--unless, of course, he was shot
+in the attempt."
+
+"It is you who say that--I have heard vastly different stories; how
+our men were starved and shot down without mercy,--not one man, but
+hundreds of them. I have it from friends in Manila that your General
+Otis is a monster who would rather kill than save at any time."
+
+"Your friends have told you that which is not true!" exclaimed Larry,
+warmly. "If anything, General Otis is too kind-hearted, especially
+with those who have done their best to put the city in a state of
+rebellion and those who have tried to burn it to the ground. I suppose
+your friends had a purpose in telling you what was not true."
+
+"I take my friends' words in preference to yours, boy," was the angry
+answer. "Who are you that come to take our country away from us--the
+country that we tried so hard to liberate from the iron grasp of
+Spain? The land is ours, and no Americans shall govern us. We will
+fight to the last,--from the cities to the towns, and from the towns
+to the villages, and then to the mountains, from one island to
+another,--and you shall never conquer us, no matter how large an army
+you send from across the ocean. But, bah, I am talking to a mere boy,
+when I might have better sense." And turning on his heel the
+under-officer strode away, out of humor with himself as well as with
+Larry.
+
+The youth felt utterly crushed, and sitting down on a rock, with a
+heart as heavy as lead, he wondered what was going to happen next.
+Would they really shoot him? The thought was agony itself.
+
+There were no other prisoners in the camp, so he was left for a long
+time alone, although several soldiers kept their eyes upon him, that
+he might not wander away. Soon supper was served, and one of the
+Tagals brought him a bowl of rice and meat. It must be confessed that
+he was now tremendously hungry, and ate all of what was given him,
+despite his down-heartedness.
+
+The meal finished, the Filipinos were sitting around their camp-fires,
+when a certain General Drummo was announced. At once there was a
+parade, which the general reviewed with satisfaction. The newcomer was
+served with supper, and then Larry was brought before him.
+
+The general had his head full of his plans for the morrow and gave the
+boy but scant attention.
+
+"You knew the risk you ran when you stole away," he said, in broken
+English. "It is true you are but a boy, yet I'll wager you can use a
+gun better than some of our own men. I cannot pardon you, for that
+would be setting a bad example. So I hereby sentence you to be shot at
+sunrise to-morrow,--and may your death be an example to others who are
+thinking of escape."
+
+Before Larry could say a word, if indeed he wanted to speak, he was
+led away to a hollow back of the camp. Here he was tied fast to a
+tree, and two soldiers were detailed to guard him until the hour for
+his execution should arrive.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+A RESCUE UNDER DIFFICULTIES
+
+
+"Nothing here, cap'n."
+
+It was Boxer the scout who spoke. For two hours he, Ben, and Luke
+Striker had been examining the trail running along the cliff. They
+could find footprints without number, but no trace of Larry.
+
+"He must have gone somewhere," replied Ben, who could not bring
+himself to give up the hunt. "He wasn't spirited away. I've a good
+mind to make a hunt at the bottom of the cliff."
+
+"As you will, cap'n. But, remember, this air side o' the valley is
+full of rebs, and if they catch us--"
+
+"We must be on our guard, Boxer."
+
+"I've got my eyes wide open," put in Luke. "I reckon on it as how I
+can see as far as any on 'em, too."
+
+The walk to the cliff had not been accomplished without difficulty.
+Twice had they come close to running into the Filipino pickets, and
+once Luke had been almost certain they were being followed, but the
+alarm proved false. A night had been spent in the jungle, and at a
+point within half a mile of where Larry lay senseless under the big
+tree!
+
+The hunt had revealed to the party the series of rough steps mentioned
+in the last chapter, and down these they now went and continued their
+search at the base of the cliff.
+
+"What's this?" came from the old sailor, presently, and he pointed to
+the broken sapling hanging in the branches of the big tree. With the
+sapling was a shred of a garment, fluttering in the breeze like a
+signal of distress.
+
+A close examination caused them to reach a conclusion which was, as we
+already know, true; namely, that Larry had come down with the sapling
+and landed in the big tree.
+
+"And he wasn't killed, either," said Boxer. "For here is where he
+built a fire and cooked some birds' eggs."
+
+"And he visited the pool, too," added Ben, examining the tracks with
+care. "Funny tracks these," he added, a second later.
+
+"He was hopping on one foot," announced the scout, gravely. "That
+looks as if he had one leg hurt."
+
+It was an easy matter to follow the trail through the jungle, for the
+ground was damp and covered with a moss which was torn with ease. Soon
+they reached the clearing where Larry had stopped to examine his
+ankle.
+
+"Hullo, more footprints!" ejaculated Boxer, his face falling. "And
+rebs, too, I'll wager a new hat. Cap'n, I'm afraid your brother has
+run into worse trouble."
+
+"It certainly looks like it," answered Ben. "Where do the footprints
+lead to?"
+
+Where but back to the very rocks down which they had come but a few
+hours before! Soon they were back at the top of the cliff again.
+
+Before leaving the valley Boxer studied the footprints closely, and
+now, although there were other footprints above, he followed the party
+having Larry in charge without making a single error. But it was slow
+work, and the encampment of the Filipinos was not discovered until
+nightfall.
+
+"We've tracked 'em to a finish," announced Boxer. "Don't go any
+further, cap'n--unless you are ready to do some tall shooting."
+
+"I can do some shooting if it's necessary," answered Ben, with a
+determined look on his face which was not to be mistaken. "I should
+like to make sure my brother is here."
+
+"We'll walk around the camp and see," said Boxer, and this they did,
+slowly and cautiously, each with his weapons ready for immediate use.
+But the Filipinos were busy eating their suppers and smoking
+cigarettes, and did not discover them.
+
+"There's Larry!" cried Luke, after a while. And he pointed to one side
+of the camp. The guards were just taking the lad to the general to be
+sentenced.
+
+"Yes, yes!" answered Ben. He handled his pistol nervously. He could
+hardly restrain himself from rushing forward and embracing the long
+lost. Boxer saw what was in his mind and held him back.
+
+"Don't be rash, cap'n," whispered the scout. "If you are, it may cost
+all of us our lives."
+
+"I will try to be careful," was the answer, with an effort. "But what
+are they going to do with him?"
+
+"They are taking him over to yonder tent."
+
+Soon Larry disappeared inside the tent, and they crouched behind the
+bushes to await developments. While waiting, Ben made a mental
+calculation of the number of the enemy.
+
+"A battalion, or more," he said to Boxer. "I wonder what they are
+doing so far from the main body of the troops?"
+
+"Oh, their army is becoming badly scattered, cap'n. General Lawton has
+'em on the run, and there won't be any of 'em left when he gets
+through with 'em."
+
+As we know, the scene in the tent was a short one, and soon they saw
+Larry come out again, and saw him tied to the tree. The two soldiers
+detailed to guard him sat on either side of their prisoner, on rocks
+about six or eight yards from the tree.
+
+"He seems to be the only prisoner in the camp," whispered Ben. "I
+wonder if I can't crawl up and cut him loose. I did that once for
+Gilbert Pennington."
+
+"No, no!" interposed Boxer. "Those guards are wide awake and will
+shoot you in a minute. Wait till it gets darker--we may get a chance
+to do something then."
+
+Slowly the minutes drifted by, Ben watching Larry every instant. He
+saw that his younger brother was exceedingly tired and held one foot
+up as if in pain. The young sailor had asked if he might not lie down,
+but this comfort had been denied him.
+
+Both of the guards were puffing vigorously on their cigarettes, when
+one chanced to throw down a lighted match close to the rock upon which
+he was sitting. It set fire to some dry grass, but instead of putting
+it out, the guard watched the tiny conflagration grow stronger.
+
+"Playing with fire, eh?" said his mate, lightly.
+
+"Yes," was the slow answer. "How I would like to see Manila go up like
+that!"
+
+"Yes, I would like to see that, too, Carlos, and the Americans in the
+flames. Ah, but the day when we are to take the capital seems a long
+way off now."
+
+"Never mind; Aguinaldo says he is soon to have reënforcements from the
+south. When they come, let the American dogs beware!"
+
+The talk was carried on in the Tagalog dialect, so Larry understood
+not a word. In the meantime, the fire crept up, making the guard's
+seat anything but comfortable.
+
+"That's too much," he observed, and was on the point of kicking the
+fire out with his foot, when of a sudden he uttered a wild yell that
+startled everybody near him. "A snake! a snake! Oh, what a long
+creature!"
+
+For from under the rock a huge reptile had glided, roused up by the
+heat. It was a snake peculiar to those mountains, and all of ten feet
+long and as thick as a man's arm. It struck the guard in the knee, and
+then whipped around in increased anger, for its tail had come in
+contact with the fire.
+
+"A snake!" echoed the second guard, and fired his Mauser at the
+reptile. But he was too excited to shoot straight, and the bullet
+glanced along the rock and struck the first guard in the cheek,
+inflicting a fairly serious wound.
+
+The cries of the two guards' were taken up on all sides of the camp,
+and especially in the vicinity of the rock from under which the
+reptile had appeared. All the soldiers recognized the snake as a
+dangerous enemy; and as the reptile moved about, first one and then
+another ran to get out of its way, several in the meantime taking
+hasty shots at it, but failing to do any serious damage. For several
+minutes the prisoner was entirely forgotten.
+
+It was Ben who saw the opportunity,--Ben and the ever-faithful
+Luke,--and rushing up, they cut Larry's bonds and fairly hustled him
+into the depth of the jungle behind the encampment. The young sailor
+could hardly understand what was taking place, but when he recognized
+his brother and his old messmate, he gave a shout of joy.
+
+"You, Ben! and Luke! Oh, I must be dreaming!"
+
+"No, you are not dreaming, Larry. We've been watching you for a long
+while, trying to do something. Can you run?"
+
+"No; I sprained my ankle, and it is still sore."
+
+"I'll carry him," said Luke. "You lead the way, cap'n. And Boxer had
+better bring up the rear guard."
+
+"Right you are," came from the scout. "Have your weapons ready, cap'n.
+We may catch it hot, in spite of the alarm over the snake. Those rebs
+will be as mad as hornets when they find the lad is missing."
+
+Away they went, Ben trying to find an easy path,--which was no small
+thing to do in that utter darkness,--and Luke coming up behind,
+breathing like a porpoise, but vowing he could carry Larry a mile were
+it necessary. Boxer kept as far to the rear as he dared without
+missing their trail, and the life of any Filipino who might have
+appeared would not have been worth a moment's purchase at the scout's
+hands.
+
+They had covered but a few hundred yards when the shouting and firing
+at the encampment ceased. "I guess the snake is dead," said Ben. "Now
+they'll be after us."
+
+The young captain was right; and soon they heard the enemy breaking
+through the jungle in detachments of three or four men each, all
+hot-footed to recapture the prisoner. They had observed the cut ropes
+and wondered if it was possible that Larry had severed them without
+assistance.
+
+It was not long before Boxer got a good shot at the nearest of the
+pursuers. His aim was true, and the Tagal went down without so
+much as a groan. His companions stopped short, and then called
+some other soldiers to the scene. "The boy is armed and shoots like
+a sharpshooter," they told each other; and after that the search was
+continued with extra care. Of course Boxer kept out of sight; and as
+soon as he could, he joined Ben and the others.
+
+"I think there must be a stream close at hand,--the one we crossed a
+few days ago," said he. "If we can get to that, we'll have some chance
+to hide."
+
+"Let's get to it, then," gasped Luke, who felt that he could keep up
+but a short while longer.
+
+"I'll take Larry, Luke," put in Ben, and the transfer was made, in
+spite of the old sailor's protests. Then Luke plunged ahead and soon
+announced that he could see the river through the bushes to the right.
+Soon they came out on some rocks. The stream was a mountain torrent, a
+rod wide and from two to three feet deep. They plunged in without
+delay.
+
+As they could not walk against such a current, they followed the
+stream on its downward course almost to the edge of the cliff, where
+the torrent formed a pretty series of waterfalls. Then they crossed to
+the other side, and climbed into a tree growing directly at the
+water's edge,--a species of willow, with long, drooping branches.
+
+"We ought to be safe here--at least for a while," said Boxer.
+
+"It's hard to tell where one would be safe here," answered Ben. "The
+whole country seems to be invested with scattered bands of the
+insurgents."
+
+He asked Larry about himself, and in a few words the younger brother
+told his story. Then Boxer stopped the talk.
+
+"In a situation like this, it's best to have only ears and eyes," he
+said, and all saw at once the aptness of the remark.
+
+But though they remained on guard the larger part of the night, nobody
+came to disturb them, and the only sound that broke the stillness was
+that of the water as it tumbled over the rocks below.
+
+Ben was much worried over Larry's ankle, which had begun to swell
+again through having stood so long on it while being tied to the tree.
+He brought a canteen of water up from the stream and bathed it with
+this. This moistened the mashed-up leaves once more, and then the
+injured member felt better, and Larry caught a nap.
+
+"I reckon we had better be moving again," said Boxer, while it wanted
+yet an hour to daylight. "Those rebs may be waiting for to see us, you
+know."
+
+"Well, my brother can't run, so perhaps it will be just as well if
+you take a scout around and see if the coast is clear," said Ben.
+
+"Certainly, cap'n." And Boxer made off without delay, moving through
+the jungle and along the stream as silently as some wild animal in
+search of its prey.
+
+Fifteen minutes and more passed, and they began to wonder when the
+scout would come back, when a low whistle reached their ears.
+
+"It's all right," came from Boxer.
+
+"Nobody in sight?" questioned Ben.
+
+"Nary a reb, cap'n."
+
+"I'm glad of it," put in Larry, with a sigh of relief. "I never want
+to fall in with them again!" And he shuddered. He would never forget
+how close he had been to death at their hands.
+
+They came down the tree, and after a drink from the stream, set out
+again, this time following the watercourse over the rocks until the
+cliff was left behind. Here they struck a bit of marsh and had to make
+a detour, finally coming out, much to their surprise, on what appeared
+to be a regular highway through the forest.
+
+"Now, if we only knew where this leads to," cried Ben.
+
+"I reckon it leads to San Isidro," came from Boxer. "But we may be a
+good number of mil--"
+
+"Look! look!" ejaculated Striker, pointing up the road. "The rebels,
+as sure as you air born! An' they air comin' about a thousand strong,
+too. Boys, we air lost!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI
+
+THE FALL OF SAN ISIDRO--CONCLUSION
+
+
+Luke Striker was right; a large force of Filipinos were sweeping down
+the road at a rapid rate, bringing with them two old field-pieces and
+a rapid-firing gun. They were commanded by several officers on
+horseback, and presented a formidable appearance to the worn-out
+Americans.
+
+"Out of sight, quick!" The cry came from Ben. "It's our only chance to
+escape."
+
+The words had scarcely left his lips when the pop-pop of several
+Mausers was heard, as the Filipino sharpshooters, who were in advance
+of the main body, opened fire upon them. Their aim was excellent, and
+both Striker and Boxer were hit, although neither seriously.
+
+"They've caught me!" ejaculated the old sailor, and staggered up
+against Ben. At the same time Boxer pitched headlong.
+
+"Oh, Luke!" The call came from Larry, who was limping painfully.
+"Where did they hit you? This is the worst of all!"
+
+"I'm struck in the shoulder. But come, Ben is right. To the jungle!"
+And Striker clutched Larry's hand in a death-like grip, bound to live
+or die with his closest friend, as the case might be.
+
+The pair started forward. Ben hesitated and looked at Boxer, and saw
+the latter try to stagger up once more. "He's not dead," thought the
+young captain, and picked the sharpshooter up. In a few seconds more
+the whole party were in the jungle again.
+
+But the Filipinos were not going to let them escape thus easily, and
+coming up on the double-quick, a detachment began to search the
+bushes, at the same time calling on the Americans to surrender if they
+wanted to save their lives.
+
+With Larry limping painfully, and both Luke and Boxer groaning in
+spite of their efforts to keep silent, the Americans looked about for
+some spot which might prove a safe hiding-place. But the ground here
+was level and the jungle rather spare, and for those who were wounded
+to climb trees was out of the question.
+
+"We'll have to make a stand, I'm afraid," said Ben, looking to his
+pistol to see if it was fully loaded. "They are coming-- Hark!"
+
+The young captain broke off short, as a loud shouting from the road
+interrupted him. Then came a volley of musketry, followed by a steady
+stream of shots.
+
+"We've got them this time, boys!" came in a ringing, English-speaking
+voice. "Forward, and don't let a man of them escape. On to San
+Isidro!"
+
+"Our troops!" cried Larry. "Oh, God be praised that they are coming
+this way!"
+
+"Yes, yes, our troops!" ejaculated Ben. "And what is more, my
+regiment!" The revulsion of feeling was so great that he felt like
+dancing a jig.
+
+The shouting and firing now increased, until it was almost upon them.
+Then followed a rush into the woods, and the little party found itself
+face to face with a score of Filipinos.
+
+At first our friends were greatly alarmed, and Ben and Larry did their
+best to defend themselves by firing as rapidly as possible at the
+Tagals as they appeared. But the enemy was retreating, and gave the
+little party scant attention. Then came a yell close at hand, and in
+a few seconds a squad of American soldiers burst through the thicket.
+
+"Dan Casey!" cried Ben, as he recognized the Irish volunteer.
+
+"Sure, an' is it Captain Russell?" came from the soldier, joyfully.
+"It is, the saints be praised! We've been a-wonderin' what had become
+of yez!"
+
+"Town mit dem Filibinos!" The call came from Carl Stummer, and soon he
+also put in an appearance. "Dis vos von lucky tay," he said, when he
+saw the party. "Ve haf dem repels on der run like neffer vos."
+
+"Then send them a-flying, Stummer," answered Ben. "Where is our
+camp?"
+
+"Pack dere apout half a mile. Ve vos move up las' night und steal von
+march on dem Filibinos."
+
+There was no time to say more, excepting to stop several of the
+soldiers, and assisted by these, the whole party moved to the rear,
+through line after line of American troops now hurrying to the firing
+line, for it was General Lawton's plan to give the Filipinos no rest
+until San Isidro and the territory in its vicinity were captured.
+
+Inside of half an hour, Ben had seen to it that Larry, Luke, and Boxer
+were all made comfortable, and then, hastily swallowing a bowl of
+coffee and some bread and meat, he hurried after his command, which
+was threshing the jungle just outside of San Isidro for scattered
+bands of the enemy such as the young captain and his party had met.
+Soon Ben was on the firing line once more, and warmly greeted by Major
+Morris, Gilmore, and his other friends.
+
+The fighting was hot, for the rebels felt that if San Isidro was
+taken, nothing would remain to them but the mountains. They had
+constructed a high embankment just outside of their capital, and this
+they were defending vigorously, many of their leading generals being
+at the front to direct the movements.
+
+But General Lawton was now in his element, and feeling that his troops
+would do whatever he asked of them, he began to spread out to the
+right and the left, thus enfilading the trenches behind the
+embankment, which presently became so uncomfortable that the rebels
+had to leave them. At the same time a centre column continued the
+attack from the front--a centre column composed principally of
+Minnesota troops and the regiment to which Ben belonged.
+
+"They are leaving the trenches!" exclaimed Major Morris, who was
+watching the progress of the battle through a field-glass. "Forward,
+boys! They are on the run again!"
+
+A rattle of rifle-shots followed, and the battalion carried the middle
+of the embankment with a wild rush, planting Old Glory on the very top
+a minute later. Then the regiment pushed on for San Isidro proper. A
+hot skirmish was had on the main street of the town; but the Filipinos
+had had enough of it, and by nightfall were making for the mountains
+as rapidly as their demoralized condition would permit.
+
+Señor Romano had told Ben where Benedicto Lupez and his brother José
+had been stopping in San Isidro, and as soon as the young captain
+could get the opportunity he hurried around to the place, which was a
+large private boarding-house.
+
+"There is a man here by the name of Lupez, I believe," he said, as he
+presented himself, followed by a detachment of half a dozen of his
+men.
+
+The boarding-house keeper, who had just hung out a white flag, eyed
+him suspiciously. "How do you know that Señor Lupez is here?" he
+questioned slowly.
+
+"I know it, and I want to see him at once," returned Ben, sharply.
+
+"He is--is not here--he--he went away this morning," came with much
+hesitation.
+
+"Don't ye believe him, captain," put in Dan Casey, who was in the
+detachment.
+
+"I will search the house," said Ben, quietly.
+
+The keeper of the boarding-place protested, but his protest was of no
+avail. The house was searched from top to bottom, and in a back wing
+they found Benedicto Lupez in bed, suffering from a badly injured leg,
+the result of trying to ride a half-broken horse which the insurgents
+had captured from the Americans. He greeted the visitors with a
+villanous scowl.
+
+At first he tried to deny his identity, but the Americans had been
+furnished with his photograph, and a wart on his forehead proved a
+clew that was conclusive. At once his effects were searched, and under
+his pillow was found a leather bag containing fifty thousand dollars
+in gold and in American bank bills.
+
+"This is the money you stole from Braxton Bogg," said Ben, severely.
+"You need not deny it. Where is the rest?"
+
+At first Benedicto Lupez refused to talk, but with a long term in an
+American prison in Manila staring him in the face, he confessed that
+just previous to the fall of San Isidro, he had divided what was left
+of the money with his brother José, who had now left for parts
+unknown. This confession was afterward proved to be true, and, later
+on, Ben learned that with five thousand dollars of the stolen funds
+José Lupez had purchased himself a general's commission in the
+insurgent army.
+
+"Well, I suppose we are lucky to get back the fifty thousand dollars,"
+said Ben, when he was telling Larry of how he had found Benedicto
+Lupez. "A half-loaf is far better than no bread at all, you know."
+
+"Yes," answered the young sailor. "And who knows but that we may run
+across this José Lupez some day, and get the balance? Anyway, the
+recovery of that fifty thousand dollars means at least eight or ten
+thousand dollars in our pockets, as well as something for Uncle Job.
+I'll wager uncle and Walter will be mighty glad to get the good news
+we have to send them." And then he added enthusiastically, which was
+just like Larry, "Hurrah, Ben, score one more victory for Young
+America and Old Glory!"
+
+ * * * * *
+
+Here we must bring to a close the adventures of Ben and Larry Russell
+previous to and during "The Campaign of the Jungle" under gallant
+General Lawton. The campaign had lasted three weeks, and during that
+time the troops had covered about a hundred and fifty miles of
+territory, fought twenty-two battles, captured twenty-eight towns, and
+destroyed large quantities of army stores, including three hundred
+thousand bushels of rice. The losses to the Americans had been about
+fifty killed and wounded, while the losses to the Filipinos were
+nearly ten times as great!
+
+With the fall of San Isidro, General Aguinaldo and his followers
+retreated to the mountains, twelve miles to the north of that town. At
+the same time the rebels who had been opposing General MacArthur's
+advance fell back to Tarlac, thirty miles beyond San Fernando. But the
+Americans had not sufficient troops at hand with which to garrison
+the many towns they had taken, and so it was not long before some of
+the rebels came back to one place and another, to take what they could
+get, and to harass those natives who had been friendly to our
+soldiers. In the meantime the rainy season put a stop to further
+activity on a large scale, and while the Filipinos sued again for
+peace (but upon their own terms), General Otis sent for additional
+troops, so that the next dry season might see the rebellion brought to
+such a finish that its resurrection would be an impossibility. Many
+Americans pitied the sad condition of the Tagalogs, but all felt that
+as matters were now situated the supremacy of the United States
+throughout the Philippines must be maintained. Once the insurgents
+submitted to American authority, we would do the very best we could by
+them.
+
+Shortly after the fall of San Isidro, General Lawton's command marched
+to join that of General MacArthur. In the meantime Larry and his
+wounded friends were removed to the hospital at Manila, whither
+Gilbert Pennington had already been taken, along with many others.
+Here the sick were given every attention, and soon the majority of
+our friends were on a speedy road to health.
+
+Ben felt that there was no need to write to Walter, as his brother
+would ere long be in the Philippines, but he wrote to his Uncle Job,
+telling about the capture of Benedicto Lupez, and adding that the
+prisoner had been sent to join Braxton Bogg, and that the recovered
+money was safe in the United States bank at Manila, waiting to be
+returned to Buffalo. He also told about Larry, and added that since
+the _Olympia_ had sailed away without him, the young sailor was now
+going to throw in his fortunes with the soldiers.
+
+The letter brought great joy to Job Dowling, and he immediately wrote
+back, stating how pleased he was, and adding that he hoped Ben would
+catch José Lupez and recover what was still missing.
+
+"That is easier said than done," said Ben to Larry, as the pair read
+the letter together. "Still, if this José Lupez is now a general in
+the rebel army, we may meet some day." Strange as it may seem, that
+day was not far off, as will be related in a sixth and concluding
+volume of this series, in which we shall meet all the Russell boys, as
+well as Gilbert, Luke, and many of our other friends again, and see
+what each did toward carrying our flag to a final and lasting victory
+in the Philippines.
+
+But now let us leave Ben and Larry, and also the others. All had done
+well and richly deserved the rest that came to them. Many adventures
+were still in store for them, but it is doubtful if any were to be
+more thrilling than those encountered during "The Campaign of the
+Jungle."
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+THE OLD GLORY SERIES.
+
+By EDWARD STRATEMEYER,
+
+_Author of "The Bound to Succeed Series," "The Ship and Shore Series,"
+etc._
+
+Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume, $1.25.
+
+ UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA Or the War Fortunes of a Castaway.
+ A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA Or Fighting for the Single Star.
+ FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS Or Under Schley on the Brooklyn.
+ UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES Or a Young Officer in the Tropics.
+ THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE Or Under Lawton through Luzon.
+
+PRESS NOTICES.
+
+ "'Under Dewey at Manila' is a thoroughly timely book, in perfect
+ sympathy with the patriotism of the day. Its title is conducive to
+ its perusing, and its reading to anticipation. For the volume is
+ but the first of the Old Glory Series, and the imprint is that of
+ the famed firm of Lee and Shepard, whose name has been for so many
+ years linked with the publications of Oliver Optic. As a matter of
+ fact, the story is right in line with the productions of that
+ gifted and most fascinating of authors, and certainly there is
+ every cause for congratulation that the stirring events of our
+ recent war are not to lose their value for instruction through
+ that valuable school which the late William T. Adams made so
+ individually distinctive.
+
+ "Edward Stratemeyer, who is the author of the present work, has
+ proved an extraordinarily apt scholar, and had the book appeared
+ anonymously there could hardly have failed of a unanimous
+ opinion that a miracle had enabled the writer of the famous
+ Army and Navy and other series to resume his pen for the volume
+ in hand. Mr. Stratemeyer has acquired in a wonderfully successful
+ degree the knack of writing an interesting educational story which
+ will appeal to the young people, and the plan of his trio of
+ books as outlined cannot fail to prove both interesting and
+ valuable."--_Boston Ideas._
+
+ "Stratemeyer's style suits the boys."--John Terhune, _Supt. of
+ Public Instruction, Bergen Co., New Jersey_.
+
+ "'The Young Volunteer in Cuba,' the second of the Old Glory
+ Series, is better than the first; perhaps it traverses more
+ familiar ground. Ben Russell, the brother of Larry, who was 'with
+ Dewey,' enlists with the volunteers and goes to Cuba, where he
+ shares in the abundance of adventure and has a chance to show his
+ courage and honesty and manliness, which win their reward. A good
+ book for boys, giving a good deal of information in a most
+ attractive form."--_Universalist Leader_
+
+_For sale by all booksellers, or sent, postpaid, on receipt of price
+by_
+
+ LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers,
+ BOSTON.
+
+
+
+
+THE SHIP AND SHORE SERIES
+
+By EDWARD STRATEMEYER.
+
+Three Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume, $1.00.
+
+ THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE Or Luke Foster's Strange Voyage.
+ REUBEN STONE'S DISCOVERY Or The Young Miller of Torrent Bend.
+ TRUE TO HIMSELF Or Roger Strong's Struggle for Place.
+
+PRESS OPINIONS OF EDWARD STRATEMEYER'S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE.
+
+ "Mr. Edward Stratemeyer is in danger of becoming very popular
+ among the young people of the country."--_Burlington_ (Iowa)
+ _Hawk-eye_.
+
+ "'The Last Cruise of the Spitfire' is of deep interest to the
+ bounding heart of an enthusiastic boy. The book leaves a good
+ impression on a boy's mind, as it teaches the triumph of noble
+ deeds and true heroism."--_Kansas City_ (Mo.) _Times_.
+
+ "Let us mention in passing two admirable books for boys, 'Reuben
+ Stone's Discovery' and 'Oliver Bright's Search,' by Edward
+ Stratemeyer, with whom we are all acquainted. This last bit of his
+ work is especially good, and the boy who gets one of these volumes
+ will become very popular among his fellows until the book is worn
+ threadbare."--_N. Y. Herald._
+
+ "A good sea-tale for boys is 'The Last Cruise of the Spitfire,' by
+ Edward Stratemeyer. There is plenty of adventure in it, a
+ shipwreck, a cruise on a raft, and other stirring perils of the
+ deep."--_Detroit_ (Mich.) _Journal_.
+
+ "In a simple, plain, straightforward manner, Mr. Edward
+ Stratemeyer endeavors to show his boy readers what persistency,
+ honesty, and willingness to work have accomplished for his young
+ hero, and his moral is evident. Mr. Stratemeyer is very earnest
+ and sincere in his portraiture of young character beginning to
+ shape itself to weather against the future. A book of this sort is
+ calculated to interest boys, to feed their ambition with hope, and
+ to indicate how they must fortify themselves against the wiles of
+ vice."--_Boston Herald._
+
+_For sale by all booksellers, or sent, postpaid, on receipt of price
+by_
+
+ LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers,
+ BOSTON.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+ Illustrations have been moved closer to their relevant paragraphs.
+
+ The author's archaic and variable spelling and hyphenation are
+ preserved.
+
+ The author's punctuation style is preserved.
+
+ Typographical problems that were changed are listed below.
+
+ Page 13: Was 'reconnoissance' (General MacArthur made a
+ =reconnaissance= in the direction of Calumpit)
+
+ Page 42: Changed single quote mark to double quote mark ("Get in
+ front of me and take to the woods opposite, =Luke,"= was
+ the hurried reply.)
+
+ Page 46: Changed single quote mark to double quote mark ("We must
+ get out of the enemy's territory before the sun =rises,"=
+ said Larry.)
+
+ Page 177: Removed extra double quote mark ("=Silence!= Not another
+ word until the lady has finished her story.")
+
+ Page 212: Was 'acount' (for men were dropping out every day on
+ =account= of fever and other tropical troubles.)
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 31317-8.txt or 31317-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/1/3/1/31317
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+